Home

Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

1. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear General information The system is active up to a speed of 75 mph 120 km h System limits Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations gt In heavy fog rain sprayed water or snow fall In tight curves gt At rapid steering angles When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you gt Upto 10 seconds after the start of the en gine via the Start Stop button gt During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle delivery gt Ifthe field of view of the camera or the front windshield are dirty or covered gt If there are constant blinding effects be cause of oncoming light e g from the sun low in the sky gt When it is dark outside 202 Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed when there is a camera malfunction Visit the nearest dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Active roll stabilization The concept The system reduces the lateral inclination of the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in curves or during quick evasive maneuvers The lateral inclination of the vehicle is bal anced out by permanent adjustment on the front and rear axles The vehicle is thus always stabilized Agility and driving comfort are increased under all driving conditio
2. lower tab and the pushbutton on the bot Overview tom of the head restraint p gt 3 Removing The head restraints cannot be removed 1 Adjusting 85 2 Left right Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Foldinandout 86 Selecting a mirror Mirrors To change over to the other mirror Exterior mirrors Slide the switch General information Adjusting electrically The mirror on the passenger side is more The setting corresponds to the direction curved than the driver s side mirror in which the button is pressed Depending on the vehicle equipment the mir ror setting is stored for the profile currently used When the vehicle is unlocked via the re mote control the position is automatically re trieved if this function is active Saving positions Seat mirror and steering wheel memory refer to page 87 Information Adjusting manually WARNING cba of electrical malfunction press edges of Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear The distance to the traffic Automatic Curb Monitor behind could be incorrectly estimated e g while changing lanes There is risk of an acci The concept dent Estimate the distance to the traffic be hind by lookingiover vour shouldeia If reverse gear is engaged the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward This improves your view of the curb and other low lying obstacles when parking e g 85 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15
3. lt a gt LED off outside air flows in continuously gt LED on the supply of outside air is perma nently shut off With constant recirculated air mode the air quality in the car s interior deteriorates and the fogging of the windows increases If there is window condensation switch off the recirculated air mode and press the button on the driver s side to uti lize the condensation sensor Make sure that air can flow to the windshield AUTO Air flow manual To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro gram first Sh SB Press the left or right side of the but ton decrease or increase air flow The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power Manual air distribution H Press button repeatedly to select a mig program Windows upper body region and footwell Upper body region and footwell Footwell Windows and footwell Windows Windows and upper body gt gt gt gt gt gt gt The selected air distribution is shown on the display of the automatic climate control Upper body region 205 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Climate control If there is window condensation press the button on the driver s side to uti lize the condensation sensor AUTO SYNC program SYNC Press button
4. gt The battery of the remote control is dis charged Replace the battery refer to page 55 gt Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power gt Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects gt Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices In the case of a malfunction unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the remote control or using the integrated key refer to page 62 Adjusting General information Settings are stored for the profile currently used Unlocking Doors About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 67 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Opening and closing 3 Doors Key 4 gf Driver s door or f All doors 5 Select desired setting gt Driver s door Only the driver s door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked Pressing again un locks the entire vehicle gt All doors The entire vehicle is unlocked Trunk lid Depending on optional features and country version this setting is not offered in some cases About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Doors Key o Tailgate or o Tailgate and door s 5 Select desired setting PEPP gt Tailgate The trunk lid is ope
5. play Indicator warning lights General information The indicator and warning lights in the instru ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi nations and colors Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when drive readiness is switched on Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Displays Controls Red lights Safety belt reminder e Flashing or illuminated safety belt on A the driver or passenger side is not buckled The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly Airbag system Q Airbag system and belt tensioner are As not working Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer s service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop Parking brake park The parking brake is set For additional information refer to Re lease parking brake refer to page 100 Brake system Braking system disrupted Continue to 0 drive moderately Have the vehicle checked immediately BRAKE by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Yellow lights Anti lock Braking System ABS Avoid sudden braking as much as pos 3 sible Braking force boost may not be working Stop cautiously Take into ac ABS count the longer brake distance Have checked immediately by a dealer
6. 3 If necessary adjust speed by braking System limits The system is not available in the following sit uations gt Speed less than 30 mph approx 50 km h gt Temporary and variable speed limit e g for road works gt Quality of navigation data inadequate Cruise control active Coasting The concept The system helps to conserve fuel Saving fuel PPA tema or To do this under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmis sion when selector lever position D Is set The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption Selector lever position D remains engaged This driving condition is referred to as coast Ing As soon as you step on the brake or accelera tor pedal the engine is automatically coupled again Information Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO re fer to page 241 driving mode Coasting is automatically activated when ECO PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control The function is available in a certain speed range A proactively driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and sup ports the fuel conserving effect of coasting Safety mode The function is not available under one of the following conditions gt DSC OFF or TRACTION activated gt Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades gt Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehi
7. My Vehicle System settings 1 2 3 Mobile devices 4 Select device 5 Hint for Office functions Malfunctions may occur with other devices or software versions 42 Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number The vehicle identification number and software part number are needed to determine which devices are supported The software version of the mobile phone may also be required About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Mobile devices Settings Bluetooth info 6 System information afte YS A software update refer to page 46 can be performed if needed Bluetooth connection Functional requirements gt compatible device refer to page 42 gt The device is ready for operation gt Bluetooth is activated on the device and in the vehicle refer to page 42 Vehicle is stationary gt Bluetooth pre settings may be required on the device e g visibility refer to the own er s manual of the device gt Anumber with at least four and a maximum of 16 digits should be defined as the Blue tooth passkey It is only required once for pairing Activating Bluetooth About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Mobile devices Settings Bluetooth aS oS YS Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 General settings Ataglance a glance Activating deactivating telephone functions To use all supported functions of the mobi
8. The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a protective jacket in the trunk Installing 1 Open the cover Follow the installation and operation instruc tions included in the protective jacket If equipped with emergency wheel remove the emergency wheel from the vehicle to mount the ski and snowboard bag y 224 gt SAS Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Storage compartments Controls Storage compartments Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Information WARNING Loose objects in the car s interior can be thrown into the car s interior while driving e g in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers There is risk of inju ries Secure loose objects in the car s inte rior lt CAUTION Anti slip pads such as anti slip mats can damage the dashboard There is risk of prop erty damage Do not use anti slip pads lt Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail able in the vehicle interior gt Glove compartment on the front passenger side refer t
9. 192 Activation points are if possible stored with town city and street address or with the GPS coordinates Using activation points The use of activation points can be switched on and off Press button Move the controller to the left ga Settings Panorama view GPS based epps Panorama view GPS based Displaying or deleting activation points 1 Press button 2 Move the controller to the left 3 F Show activation points A list of all activation points is displayed 4 Delete this activation point or Delete all activation points Setting brightness and contrast via iDrive With Surround View or Panorama View switched on 1 Move the controller to the left 2 gt Brightness gt Contrast 3 Set the desired value Functional limitations The system can be used only to a limited ex tent in the following situations gt In poor light In case of soiled cameras V With a door open V With the tailgate open With exterior mirrors folded in V Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Controls Gray hatched areas with symbol e g open door in the camera image mark areas that are currently not displayed Gray hatched areas without symbol e g in front of the vehicle mark areas that are not visible to the cameras System limits Non visible areas Areas around the vehicle that are not visible because of
10. 2 System settings 3 Mobile devices A symbol indicates for which function a device is used Function Sy Telephone Si Additional telephone fi Bluetooth audio LJ Apps iziii Miracast gt Internet hotspot L Touch Command 41 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GEE General settings Information WARNING Operating the integrated information system and communication devices while driv ing can distract from traffic It is possible to lose control of the vehicle There is risk of an accident Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows If necessary stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary lt Compatible devices General information Details on which mobile phones and external devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup ported can be obtained at www bmwusa com bluetooth When pairing a mobile phone as telephone or additional telephone it is displayed which fea tures are supported e g brief messages gt Close and do not show again With the next pairing of the mobile phone there is no display of which features the mobile phone supports gt OK With the next pairing of the mobile phone there is another display of which features the mobile phone supports It is possible to choose whether there is a dis play when pairing the mobile phone of which features are supported About iDrive
11. 4 Follow the Safety instructions refer to page 283 With the wheel chock from the onboard ve hicle tool kit also secure the vehicle against rolling away at the front wheel of the opposite side For this place the wheel chock behind the front wheel diagonally across Switching off the air suspension refer to page 200 Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn Jacking up the vehicle 1 Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point closest to the wheel such that the vehicle jack foot is vertically beneath the vehicle 283 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Replacing components jacking point with the entire surface on the ground 2 Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectan gular recess of the jacking point for crank ing it up 3 Crank it up until the wheel in question lifts off of the ground Wheel mounting Mount one emergency wheel only 1 Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove the wheel 2 Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two bolts If original BMW light alloy wheels are not mounted any accompanying lug bolts also have to be used 3 Screw in the remaining the lug bolts and tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern 4 Lower the vehicle and remove the vehicle jack After the wheel change 1 Tighten the lug bolts crosswise The tight ening torque is 101 Ib ft 140 Nm 2 Stow the nonworking wheel in the trunk The no
12. Changing between a function and the Owner s Manual To switch from a function e g radio to the Owner s Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays 1 oron Press button 2 Owner s Manual 3 Select the desired page in the Owner s Manual 4 oon Press button again to return to last displayed function 5 me Press button to return to the page of the Owner s Manual displayed last To alternate permanently between the last dis played function and the Owner s Manual re peat steps 4 amp 5 Opens a new display every time Programmable memory buttons General information The jumps into the Owner s Manual can be stored on the Programmable memory buttons refer to page 28 and called up directly Storing 1 Select the desired entry point via iDrive gt Quick reference gt Search by pictures gt Keyword search gt Animations 2 Press desired button and hold for more than 2 seconds Executing 1 7 Press the corresponding button The owner s manual is directly dis played via the selected entry point 50 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle Ataglance a glance Information Provided by oy Oo eE ANLE r 51 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle
13. DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be switched on if needed Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Controls Changing the speed Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set If active the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear gt Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the resistance point the desired speed in creases or decreases by 1 mph 1 km h gt Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi mum of 5 mph 10 km h Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action Distance WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility Due to the system lim its braking can be late There is risk of acci dents or risk of property damage Be aware to the traffic situation at all times Adjust the dis tance to the traffic and weather conditions and maintain the prescribed safety distance possi bly by braking lt Without steering and lane guidance assistant reducing distance Press button repeatedly until the de sired distance is set Instrument cluster will display selected dis tance refer to page 172 Without steering and lane guidance assistant increasing distance Press button repeatedly until the de sired distance is set Instrument cluster will display selected dis t
14. During long periods when the vehicle is parked it can lower itself This is not a mal function Dynamic Damping Control The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav eling on uneven road surfaces The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort fitting road surface and driving style General information The system offers several different damping settings These are assigned to the different driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Control refer to page 110 Tuning Drive mode Damper tuning COMFORT PLUS comfortable SPORT firm COMFORT ECO PRO balanced out Executive Drive Pro The concept Executive Drive Pro is an actively controlled chassis It increases driving comfort and mini mizes the lateral tilt when driving around curves This increases both the agility of the vehicle as well as the vehicle comfort Executive Drive Pro includes the following sys tems gt Active damping adjustment refer to page 201 gt Active roll stabilization refer to page 202 Active damping adjustment The concept The system increases driving comfort Using a camera in the area of the interior mirror the road surface is detected and damping auto matically adjusted to the road surface 201 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driving comfort Overview Camera The camera is installed near the interior rear view mirror
15. Individual settings can be adjusted in the SPORT INDIVIDUAL drive mode Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driving Configuration About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Driving Experience Control Configure SPORT INDIVIDUAL Select desired setting Ls Se The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard settings Reset to SPORT STANDARD ECO PRO The concept Consumption optimized tuning refer to page 241 Switching on Press button ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument cluster ECO PRO ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL The concept Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL drive mode Configuration About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Driving Experience Control Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL Select desired setting oS a The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard settings 112 Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD ADAPTIVE The concept Comfort oriented drive mode whose tuning is automatically adjusted to the driving situation and driving style If the navigation system is active upcoming road sections are considered as well Switching on Press button ADAPTIVE is displayed ADAPTIVE in the instrument cluster Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Displays Controls Displays Ve
16. Messages are additionally displayed in the sta tus field Retrieving messages About iDrive 1 Notifications 2 Select the desired message The respective menu is opened where the message is displayed 40 Deleting messages All messages except Check Control mes sages can be deleted from the list Check Control messages are displayed as long as they are relevant About iDrive 1 Notifications 2 Select the desired message 3 orron Press button 4 Delete this notification or Delete all notifications Adjusting The following settings can be adjusted gt Select the applications from which mes sages will be permitted gt Define the number of new messages per application e g maximum ten new e mails gt Sort the messages according to date or priority gt Combine several messages of the same type About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings 3 Notifications 4 Select desired setting Deleting personal in the vehicle The concept Depending on the usage the vehicle saves personal data such as stored radio stations These personal data can be permanently de leted through iDrive Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 General settings Ataglance a glance General information Depending on the equipment package the fol lowing data can be deleted gt Profile settings Stored radio stations Stored Favorites buttons Travel and on
17. Restore software 5 gt Previous version The previous software version is re stored gt Default software settings The first software version is restored 6 Remove software or Remove software 7 OK Wait for restore 9 Confirm system restart What to do if Information on compatible mobile phones re fer to page 42 The mobile phone could not be paired or con nected gt Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on the mobile phone Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and on the mobile phone gt Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive gt Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the passkey Repeat pairing gt Is NFC activated on the mobile phone Ac tivate NFC on the mobile phone gt Is distance from mobile phone to near field communication antenna too far Hold mo bile phone directly to the antenna in the in strument cluster gt Do the control numbers on the mobile phone and vehicle match Repeat the pair ing procedure gt Are too many Bluetooth devices con nected to the mobile phone or vehicle De lete connections with other devices if needed 47 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GECUL General settings gt Is Bluetooth audio activated Deactivate Bluetooth audio gt Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the device list on the m
18. Settings 2 Reset to factory settings 37 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GECUL General settings General settings Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Language Setting the language About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings 3 Language 4 Language 5 Select desired setting The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system refer to page 34 Time Setting the time zone About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Date and time Time zone ee YS Select desired setting 38 The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Setting the time About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings 3 Date and time 4 Time 5 Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed D Press the controller 7 Turn the controller until the desired mi nutes are displayed 8 Press the controller The setting is stored for the drive profi
19. The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off 98 Displays in the instrument cluster The display in the tachometer indicates that the Auto Start Stop function is ready for an Au tomatic engine start The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic en CSA gine stop have not been met Functional limitations The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations gt Incase of asteep downhill grade gt Brake not engaged strongly enough gt The external temperature is high and auto matic climate control is running gt The car s interior has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level If window condensation is imminent gt Engine or other parts not at operating tem perature gt Engine cooling is required y The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned Vehicle battery is heavily discharged At higher elevations The engine compartment lid is unlocked HDC Hill Descent Control is activated The parking assistant is activated Stop and go traffic Selector lever position in N or R After driving in reverse yy Y ye yy ye ye Use of fuel with high ethanol content Starting the engine The engine starts automatically under the fol lowing conditions Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving Controls gt By releasing the brake pedal gt When Automatic Hold is
20. The current settings on the driver s side for temperature air flow air distribution and AUTO program are transferred to the front passenger side and to the left and right rear To switch off press the button again The program is switched off if the settings on the front passenger side or in the rear are changed Defrosts windows and removes condensation MAX Press button Ice and condensation are quickly re moved from the windshield and the front side windows For this purpose point the side vents onto the side windows as needed Adjust air flow with the program active If there is window condensation you AUTO i i a can also switch on the air conditioning or press the button to utilize the condensation sensor Rear window defroster irl Press button The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time Microfilter activated charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air The activated charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle 206 This combined filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance refer to page 279 of your vehicle Ventilation Setting The air flow directions can be individually ad justed gt Direct ventilation The air flow is directly pointed onto the person The air flow heats or cools noticea bly depending on the adjusted tempera ture gt Ind
21. VI 15 Reference Everything from A to Z SET button see Active Cruise Control ACC 168 SET button see Cruise con trol 175 Settings locking unlock ing 67 Settings on the Control Dis play 38 Settings storing for seat mir rors steering wheel 87 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 106 Shoulder support front 77 Shoulder support rear 79 Side airbag 136 Side collision warning 156 Signaling horn 14 Signals when unlocking 68 Sitting safely 76 Size 298 Ski and snowboard bag 224 Slide tilt glass roof 73 Smoker s package 217 Snow chains 264 Socket OBD Onboard Diag nostics 280 Sockets see Connecting electrical devices 220 Software update 46 SOS button 286 Spare fuse 285 Spare tire see Emergency wheel 282 Speed average 124 Speed limiter display 120 Speed Limit Information 120 Speed warning 125 Split screen 27 Sport displays torque dis play performance dis play 125 SPORT drive mode see Driv ing Dynamics Control 110 SPORT INDIVIDUAL drive mode see Driving Dynamics Control 110 310 SPORT INDIVIDUAL see Driving Dynamics Con trol 110 Sport program Steptronic transmission 106 SPORT see Driving Dynam ics Control 110 Stability control systems 163 Start stop automatic func tion 98 Start Stop button 97 Start function during malfunc tion 55 Starting see drive readi ness 97 Starting the engine see drive readiness 97 Status control display tires 265
22. Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary An arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on Hints on refueling refer to page 250 Instrument cluster with enhanced features Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary The current range is also dis played as numerical value An arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on Hints on refueling refer to page 250 Tachometer Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field In this range the fuel supply is inter rupted to protect the engine Operating readiness and drive readiness The letters OFF on the tachom eter indicate that the drive readi OFF ness is switched off and operat ing readiness is switched on The letters READY in the tach ometer indicate that the vehicle is ready for driving 118 Further information see Idle state operating and drive readiness refer to page 19 Engine temperature 3 gt Cold engine the pointer is at the low temperature end Drive at moderate engine Z and vehicle speeds gt Normal operating tempera ture the pointer is in the middle or in the lower half of the temperature display gt Hot engine the pointer is at the high end of the temperature range A Check Control message is also displayed Check the coolant level refer to page 277 External temperature If the
23. With the setting that snow chains are mounted the rear wheel steering is switched off About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Tire chains 4 Tire chains installed Starting with the permissible maximum speed with snow chains of 30 mph 50 km h the rear wheel steering will be switched on automati Cally Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires The system warns you if there is a loss of pressure in one or more tires For this purpose sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and tire temperature Information With use of the system observe further infor mation found under Tire inflation pressure re fer to page 254 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Wheels and tires Mobility Functional requirements The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure otherwise relia ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is not assured Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM can be displayed e g whether or not the TPM is active About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle status 3 1 Tire Pressure Monitor The status Is disp
24. specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Anti lock Braking System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking The vehicle contains its steering power even during full brake applications thus increasing active safety ABS is operational every time you start the en gine Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly this system automatically produces the greatest possible braking force boost It reduces the braking dis tance to a minimum during emergency stop This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop Adaptive brake assistant In combination with the Active Cruise Control this system ensures that the brakes respond even more rapidly when braking in critical sit uations Drive off assistant This system supports driving off on inclines The parking brake is not required 1 Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake 2 Release the foot brake and drive off with out delay After the foot brake is released the vehicle is held in place for approx 2 seconds The possible holdi
25. Controls Adjusting Activating D Slide the switch to the driver s side mirror position 2 Engage selector lever position R Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror position Fold in and out CAUTION Depending on the vehicle width the ve hicle can be damaged in car washes There is risk of property damage Before washing fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button P Press button Possible at speeds up to approx 15 mph 20 km h Beneficial in the following situations gt In car washes gt On narrow roads gt For folding mirrors back out that were folded away manually Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx 25 mph 40 km h Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running Automatic dimming feature Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim med Photocells are used to control the Interior rearview mirror refer to page 86 86 Interior rearview mirror automatic dimming feature Overview EAD Photocells are used for control gt Inthe mirror glass gt On the back of the mirror Functional requirement For proper operation gt Keep the photocells clean gt Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield Rear vanity mirror down ay a a a Press vanity mirror The vanity mirror folds down The angle
26. Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving stability control systems Controls gt When freeing vehicle from deep snow or driving off from loose grounds gt When driving with snow chains Overview Button in the vehicle a pe DSC OFF Indicator warning lights If DTC is activated TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster amp The indicator lamp lights up DTC Dy oe namic Traction Control is activated Activating deactivating DTC Activating DTC a ore Press button TRACTION is displayed in the instru ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up Deactivating DTC a aa Press button again TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica tor lamp go out xDrive xDrive is the all wheel drive system of the ve hicle Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC further optimize traction and driving dynamics The xDrive all wheel drive system variably dis tributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface HDC Hill Descent Control The concept HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto matically controls vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients Without applying the brakes the vehicle moves at slightly more than walking speed Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds below approx 22 mph 35 km h When driving downhill the vehicle reduces its speed to approx walking speed and then keeps its speed constan
27. Position of switch 2 The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the low beams are switched on System limits The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment of lighting conditions Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Lights Controls E g the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather To avoid safety risks under these conditions you should always switch on the lights manually Daytime running lights General information Position of switch 0 DQ 40 The daytime running lights light up when the drive ready state is switched on After the drive ready state is switched off the parking lights light up in position 30 Q Activating deactivating In some countries daytime running lights are mandatory so it may not be possible to deacti vate the daytime running lights About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Lighting 4 Exterior lighting 5 Select desired setting The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Adaptive Light Control The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight control system that enables dynamic illumina tion of the road surface General information Depending on the steering angle and other pa rameters the light from the headlight follows the course of the road To avoid blinding oncoming traffic the Adap tive Light Control does not swiv
28. Setting the interval time or sensitivity of the rain sensor a Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor Up short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor Down long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor Clean the windshield headlights 1 Pull the wiper lever towards you The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly In addition the headlights are cleaned at regu lar intervals when the vehicle s lights are acti vated WARNING The washer fluid can freeze onto the win dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view There is risk of an accident Only use the washer systems if the washer fluid cannot freeze Use antifreeze if needed CAUTION When the wiper water container is empty the wash pump cannot work as in tended There is risk of property damage Do not use the washer system when the wash wa ter container is empty lt Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are automati cally heated while operating readiness is switched on Fold out position of the wipers Fold wipers back when you want to change the blades or with pending low temperatures WARNING If the wipers start moving in the folded away state damage may occur to parts of the vehicle or body parts can be jammed There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
29. The concept 3 Tone The emergency braking function of PDC ini 4 Volume settings tiates an emergency braking in case of acute risk of collision Due to system limits a colli 182 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Controls sion cannot be prevented under all circum stances The function is available from walking speed while backing up or rolling backward A press of the gas pedal interrupts the braking intervention After emergency braking to a stop further creeping toward an obstacle is possible To creep toward the obstacle lightly press the ac celerator pedal and release it again If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed the vehicle drives off as usual Manual braking is possible at any time General information The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC and parking assistant Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi tions Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively interfere in the respective situations Activating deactivating the system About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Parking Active PDC emergency brake function aS SiS Active PDC emergency brake function The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Online Edition fo
30. To close slide the cover backward The cover slides forward Clothes hooks WARNING Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can obstruct the view while driving There is risk of an accident When suspending clothing articles from the hooks ensure that they will not obstruct the driver s view WARNING Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers There is risk of injuries and risk of property damage Only hang lightweight objects e g clothing articles from the clothes hooks lt The clothes hooks are located in the grab han dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear Storage compartments in the trunk Multi function hook Information WARNING Improper use of the multifunction hooks can lead to a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers There is risk of injuries and risk of property damage Only hang lightweight objects e g shopping bags from the multifunction hooks Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has been appropriately secured Overview A lan 7 A multi function hook is located on the left side in the trunk Press on the multi function hook and turn until it engages Storage compartment on the right side A storage compartment is available on the right side of the cargo area 229 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Storage compartme
31. WARNING Indicators and warnings do not relieve from the personal responsibility Due to sys tem limits warnings or reactions of the system may not be output or they may be output too late or incorrectly There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi tions Watch traffic closely and actively inter fere in the respective situations 139 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Safety WARNING Due to system limits individual functions can malfunction during tow starting towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated e g approach control warning with light brak ing function There is risk of an accident Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow starting towing lt Overview Button in the vehicle Intelligent Safety Switching on off Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati cally active after every departure Some Intelli gent Safety systems activate according to the last setting Press Status button Button lights up green all Intelli gent Safety systems are switched on Button lights up orange some In telligent Safety systems are switched off or settings for the sub functions were changed Button does not light up all Intel ligent Safety systems are switched off 140 Press button The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off all
32. additional telephone If two mobile phones are connected to the ve hicle the functions of phone and additional phone can be switched About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Mobile devices Settings ae SY Swap telephone 1 and 2 Software Update General information The vehicle supports various external devices depending on the current software version With a software update compatibility with the vehicle can be improved so that the vehicle can support new mobile phones or new exter nal devices e g 46 Updates and related current information are available at www bmw com update Displaying the current version The currently installed software is displayed About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings 3 Software update 4 Show current version If an update has been carried out before select the desired version to display additional infor mation Updating software via USB The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary About iDrive 1 Store the file for the software update in the main directory of a USB flash drive 2 Connect the USB data storage to an USB interface refer to page 221 My Vehicle System settings Software update Update software USB Install software 9 OK 10 Await the updating ONO OP w 11 Confirm system restart Updating software via BMW Teleservices Software update via BMW Teleservices is country specif
33. change There is risk of an accident Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi cate the final failure of a tire Reduce speed and stop otherwise pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci dent Do not continue driving Contact a dealer s service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Engine compartment Mobility Engine compartment Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to 7 Washer fluid reservoir Jump starting positive battery terminal Oil filler neck Coolant reservoir engine A O N the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Important features in the engine comp wA 5 Gasoline engine only coolant reservoir air conditioning 6 Jump starting negative battery terminal 7 Vehicle identification number Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 271 Mobility Engine compartment Hood Information WARNING Improperly executed work in the engi
34. gent Safety systems are switched on Button lights up orange some In telligent Safety systems are switched off or settings for the sub functions were changed Button does not light up all Intel ligent Safety systems are switched off Setting the warning time About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Intelligent Safety Frontal Collision Warning ae wp Select desired setting The selected time is stored for the profile cur rently used Warning with braking function Display If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi nent a warning symbol appears in the instru ment cluster and in the Head Up Display Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Controls Symbol Measure Symbol lights up red prewarning Brake and increase distance Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds acute warning DIDI You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu ver Prewarning This warning is issued e g when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning Acute warning with braking function Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap proaches another object at a relatively high dif ferential speed The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning If necessary the
35. gt The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics In this case have the electronics checked at the next opportu nity and have them replaced if needed Storage BWA The mobility system is in the left storage com partment of the cargo area Sealant container Va gt Sealant container arrow 1 gt Filling hose arrow 2 Observe use by date on the sealant container Compressor 12 3456 7 Bottle unlocking Holder for bottle Inflation pressure dial Reduce inflation pressure On off switch Compressor Connector cable for socket O N OO FP WN Connection hose Filling the tire with sealant 1 Shake the sealant container TE gt 261 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Wheels and tires 2 Pull filling hose completely out of the cover 5 With the compressor switched off insert of the sealant container Do not kink the the plug into the power socket inside the hose vehicle LY co ww 3 Slide the sealing container into the holder 6 With operating readiness switched on or on the compressor housing ensuring that the engine running switch on the com it engages audibly pressor aD 4 Screw the filling hose of the sealant con DANGER tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila wheel tion is insufficient harmful exhaust gases can ey enter into the vehicle The exhaust gases con ta
36. management refer to page 59 in order to select your own profile for example This allow you to call up personal vehicle settings if you did not unlock the vehicle with your own key 1 Change driver profile 2 Select profile refer to page 59 As soon as the engine is started or any key is pressed the last selected key is displayed on the Control Display To exit the welcome screen via iDrive Start system Adjusting The settings for the following systems and functions are saved in the active profile The scope of storable settings is country and equipment dependable gt Unlocking and locking gt Lights gt Climate control gt Radio Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Opening and closing Controls Instrument cluster Programmable memory buttons Volumes tone Control Display Navigation TV Park Distance Control PDC Rearview camera Side View Head up Display Driving Dynamics Control VV VV VV VV VV VV VV Seat position exterior mirror position steering wheel position Cruise control Vv vV Intelligent Safety Night vision Profile management Selecting a profile Regardless of the remote control in use a dif ferent profile may be activated About iDrive My Vehicle Driver profiles Select profile OK All settings stored in the called up profile are automatically applied V AON gt gt The called up profile is assigned to the re
37. neck 1 Let the engine cool 2 Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate then open it 3 Open the coolant reservoir lid 4 Thecoolant level is correct if it lies be tween the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck Adding 1 Let the engine cool 2 Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate then open it 211 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Coolant 3 Ifthe coolant is low slowly add coolant up to the specified level do not overfill 4 Turn the lid until there is an audible click The arrows on the coolant reservoir and the lid must point towards one another 5 Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi nated as soon as possible Disposal KY Comply with the relevant environmen tal protection regulations when dispos ing of coolant and coolant additives 278 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Maintenance Mobility Maintenance Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when
38. s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop DSC Dynamic Stability Control Flashing DSC controls the drive and braking forces The vehicle is stabi lized Reduce speed and adapt driving style to the driving circumstances Illuminated DSC failed Have system checked immediately by a dealer s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop For additional information refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC refer to page 163 DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated amp Dynamic Stability Control DSC is lt lt switched off or Dynamic Traction Con trol DTC is switched on For additional information refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC refer to page 163 and Dynamic Traction Control DTC refer to page 164 Flat Tire Monitor FTM The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire Reduce your speed and stop cau tiously Avoid sudden braking and steering ma neuvers For more information see Flat Tire Monitor re fer to page 268 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Illuminated the Tire Pressure Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire Reduce your speed and stop cautiously Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers Flashing and then continuously illuminated no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be detected 115 Online
39. the engine Engaging selector lever position N 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Press and hold the Start Stop button The starter must audibly start 3 Press and hold the selector lever into se lector lever position N until selector lever position N is displayed in the instrument cluster A corresponding Check Control message is displayed 4 Release Start Stop button and selector lever 5 Release brake as soon as the starter stops 6 Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own Launch Control The concept Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction 109 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driving General information The use of Launch Control causes premature component wear since this function represents a very heavy load for the vehicle Do not use Launch Control during the break in refer to page 234 period To increase vehicle stability activate DSC again as soon as possible An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode Requirements Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up that is after uninterrupted driving of at least 6 miles 10 km To start with Launch Control do not steer the steering wheel Start with launch control While the engine is running 1 Sor Press button TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster an
40. vehicles gt With thin or wedge shaped objects With moving objects With elevated protruding objects such as ledges or cargo With objects with corners and sharp edges With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences gt For objects with porous surfaces Low objects already displayed e g curbs can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of the vehicle is not taken into account by the system False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range gt In heavy rain gt When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice When sensors are covered in snow gt Onrough road surfaces On uneven surfaces such as speed bumps gt In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls e g in underground ga rages 184 gt In automatic car washes Through heavy pollution Due to other ultrasound sources e g sweeping machines high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed Py White symbol is displayed and the AN range of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display PDC has failed Have the system checked Without Surround View rearview camera The concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards The area behind the vehicle is sh
41. when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on lt 1 Turn on operations 2 With icy conditions make sure that blades are not frozen to the windshield 3 Press and hold wiper lever downward until the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi tion 105 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving After the wipers are folded back down the wiper system must be reactivated 1 Switch on drive readiness and press and hold the wiper lever downward again 2 Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation Washer fluid Information WARNING Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful substances and are flammable There is risk of fire and risk of injuries Observe the instructions on the containers Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources Do not refill oper ating materials into different bottles Store op erating materials out of reach of children United States The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U S EPA and many individual states do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con tainer Use of BMW s Windshield Washer Concen trate or the equivalent is recommended lt WARNING Improperly executed work under the hood can damage components and lead to a safety risk There is risk of accidents or risk of pr
42. AG Munich US English VI 15 07 15 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper bleached without chlorine suitable for recycling Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index refer to page 302 6 Information Ata glance 14 Cockpit 19 Idle state operating and drive readiness 21 iDrive 30 BMW gesture control 33 Voice activation system 36 BMW Touch Command 38 General settings 49 Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle Controls 54 Opening and closing 76 Adjusting 93 Transporting children safely 97 Driving 113 Displays 129 Lights 136 Safety 163 Driving stability control systems 168 Driver assistance systems 200 Driving comfort 203 Climate control 215 Interior equipment 225 Storage compartments Driving tips 234 Things to remember when driving 237 Loading 240 Saving fuel Mobility 250 252 254 271 273 277 279 281 286 291 Refueling Fuel Wheels and tires Engine compartment Engine oil Coolant Maintenance Replacing components Breakdown assistance Care Reference 298 301 302 Technical data Appendix Everything from A to Z Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 _ Information Information Using this Owner s Manual Orientation The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index An initial overview of the veh
43. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety comfort and convenience are described here Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing Vehicle features and options Overview This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Unlocking Locking Remote control key Opening the trunk lid mh ON General information Panic mode The vehicle is supplied with two remote con trols with integrated key Integrated key Every remote control holds a replaceable bat tery You may set the key functions depending on O DE the optional features and country specific ver 1 sion For Settings refer to page 67 n eae The vehicle stores personal settings for every aus l remote control Profile refer to page 58 The remote controls hold information on re quired maintenance Service data in the re mote control refer to page 279 Press button arrow 1 and remove the key ar row 2 The integrated key fits the following locks gt Driver s door gt Glove compartment The glove compartment contains a switch for separately securi
44. Display gt Time of arrival arrow 1 gt Distance to destination arrow 2 ECO PRO bonus range In the ECO PRO mode the ECO PRO bonus range refer to page 243 can be displayed in the instrument cluster Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Displays Controls Onboard computer on the Control Display General information Two types of onboard computers are available on the Control Display gt Onboard info the values can be reset as often as necessary gt Trip computer the values provide an overview of the current trip Calling up the onboard computer or trip computer About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Driving information 3 Onboard info or Trip computer Resetting the trip on board computer About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Driving information 3 Trip computer 4 gt Reset all values are reset gt A Automatic reset all values are reset approx 4 hours after the vehicle came to a standstill Resetting the fuel consumption or speed About iDrive My Vehicle Driving information Onboard info Consumption or Speed OK af eh SS Sport displays The concept On the Control Display the current values for performance and torque can be displayed if the vehicle is appropriately equipped Displaying sport displays on the Control Display About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Technology in action 3 Sport displays Speed warni
45. The concept Speed limit detection Speed limit detection shows the current maxi mum permitted speed in the instrument clus ter The camera in the area of the interior rear view mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable overhead sign posts Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions etc are also detected and compared with the vehicle s onboard data such as for the rain sensor and will be dis played depending on the situation The system takes into account the information stored in 120 the navigation system and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess visi bility and traffic situation There is risk of an ac cident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations lt Overview Camera The camera is installed near the interior rear view mirror Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear Switching on off About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings 3 Displays 4 Instrument panel 5 INDIVIDUAL 6 Traffic sign detection Speed Limit Info If speed limit detection is switched on it is shown in the instrument cluster Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Display The following is
46. Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM 264 Flat tire warning lamp 266 269 Flooding 235 Floor carpet care 294 Floor mats care 294 Folding table in the rear 223 Fold out position wiper 105 Foot brake 235 Fragrance cartridge see Am bient air package 211 305 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Fragrance see Ambient air package 211 Fragrancing see Ambient air package 211 Front airbags 136 Front center armrest 227 Front cupholder 228 Front fog lights 132 Front passenger seat adjust ing 78 Front seat passenger airbags automatic deactivation 138 Front seat passenger airbags indicator lamp 138 Front seats 76 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 268 Fuel 252 Fuel consumption see Aver age fuel consumption 124 Fuel filler flap 250 Fuel gauge 118 Fuel lid 250 Fuel quality 252 Fuel recommendation 252 Fuel tank capacity 300 Fuse 285 G Garage door opener see Uni versal Integrated Remote Control 215 Gasoline 252 Gear change Steptronic transmission 106 Gear shift indicator 120 General driving notes 234 General settings 38 Gentleman function 78 Gesture 30 Gesture control 30 Gesture operation 30 Glare shield 217 Glass sunroof powered 73 Glove compartment 225 306 Gross vehicle weight ap proved 299 H Handbrake see Parking brake 100 Hand held transmitter alter nating code 216 Hand movement 30 Hazard warning flashers 286
47. Unlocking settings 67 Unlocking via door lock 62 Updates made after the edito rial deadline 7 Updating software 46 Upholstery care 293 USB interface 221 V Vanity mirror 217 Variable steering Integral Ac tive Steering 166 Vehicle battery 284 Vehicle battery replac ing 284 Vehicle break in 234 Vehicle care 292 Vehicle features and op tions 7 Vehicle identification num ber 10 Vehicle jack 282 Vehicle paint 292 Vehicle status 126 Vehicle storage 294 Vehicle wash 291 Ventilation 206 Venting see ventilation 206 Vent see ventilation 206 Video 6 VIN see vehicle identification number 10 Vitality programs 90 Vitalization programs see Vi tality programs 90 Voice activation system 33 W Warning against cross traf fic 197 Warning and indicator lamps see Check Control 114 Warning displays see Check Control 114 Warning lamp in the exterior mirror see Active Blind Spot Detection 153 Warning lamp in the exterior mirror see crossing traffic warning 197 Warning messages see Check Control 114 Warning triangle 287 Warranty 7 Washer fluid 106 Washer nozzles wind shield 105 Washer system 103 Washing vehicle 291 Water on roads 235 Weights 299 Welcome lamps during un locking 60 Welcome Light Carpet see welcome lights 130 Welcome lights 130 Welcome screen 58 Wheel cleaner 293 Wheels changing 258 Wheels everything on wheels and tires 254 Wheels Flat Tir
48. a level road Only one turning radius line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain an The car wash view assists when entering a car gle wash by displaying the floor and the own lane Information Provided by 190 b a DEALER Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 sistance systems WE The concept Obstacles on the side of the vehicle are de tected by the sensors of the system The sys tem warns against these obstacles Obstacle markings are displayed sideways on the vehicle to protect the vehicle sides gt Gray markings the area next to the vehicle was not captured No markings no obstacles were detected gt Color markings warning against detected obstacles Limits of side protection The system only displays stationary obstacles that were previously detected by sensors while passing them The system does not detect whether an ob stacle moves later on For this reason at standstill the markings are shown in the dis play in gray after a certain time The area next to the vehicle must be newly captured An imminent collision of the wheel with the curb is displayed The wheel in question is marked in red The maximum opening angle of the doors is displayed in selector lever position P Panorama View r eS The system provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections Road users concealed by obstacles to th
49. a possible driving range of approx 50 miles 80 km A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ ently e g it has reduced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and different self steering properties Adjust your driving style accordingly Avoid abrupt steering ma neuvers or driving over obstacles e g curbs potholes etc Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip the actual distance may be shorter or lon ger depending on the driving speed road con ditions external temperature cargo load etc WARNING Your vehicle handles differently when a run flat tire is damaged and has low or missing tire inflation pressure e g your lane stability is reduced when braking braking distances are longer and the self steering properties will change There is risk of an accident Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h lt System limits The system does not function properly if a re set has not been carried out e g a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire s temperature Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire s temperature thus increasing the tire inflation pressure The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply The system cannot indica
50. activated press the accelerator pedal After the engine starts accelerate as usual Safety mode After the engine switches off automatically it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met gt The driver s safety belt is unbuckled and the driver s door is open gt The hood was unlocked Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time The engine can only be started via the Start Stop button Functional limitations Even if driving off was not intended the deacti vated engine starts up automatically in the fol lowing situations gt Excessive warming of the car s interior when the cooling function is switched on gt Excessive cooling of the car s interior when the heating is switched on gt If window condensation is imminent The steering wheel is turned gt Change from selector lever position D to N orR gt Change from selector lever position P to N DorR Vehicle battery is heavily discharged gt Start of an oil level measurement Activating deactivating the system manually Using the button D IP i 9 5 a Press button OFF gt LED comes on Auto Start Stop function is deactivated The engine is not automatically switched off The engine is started during an automatic engine stop The Auto Start Stop function is deacti vated in selector lever position M S or in SPORT drive mode gt LED goes out Auto St
51. an other qualified service center or repair shop Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels equipped with the tires of the following size gt 245 50R 18 gt 245 45R 19 Follow the snow chain manufacturer s instruc tions Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight Retighten as needed accord ing to the chain manufacturer s instructions Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains as doing so may result in incorrect readings Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains as doing so may result in incorrect readings When driving with snow chains briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if needed Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph 50 km h when using snow chains Rear wheel steering during operation with snow chains General information In order to guarantee free running of the wheels when operating with snow chains the rear wheel steering of the integral active steer ing must be switched off when snow chains 264 are mounted For this it is possible to confirm via iDrive that snow chains are mounted Information WARNING When rear wheel steering is switched on and snow chains are mounted there can be contact between snow chains and the chassis There is risk of accidents or risk of property damage With mounted snow chains switch off the rear wheel steering lt Switching off rear wheel steering
52. any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly This may be caused by damage incurred during parking e g A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails The function for detecting and responding when approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in the following situations gt During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle delivery gt Ifthe camera is malfunctioning or dirty A Check Control message is displayed Cruise control The concept The system maintains a preset speed via the buttons on the steering wheel The system brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking is insufficient General information Depending on the driving settings the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas The desired speed is also maintained downhill but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient Due to the driving style that minimizes fuel consumption in ECO PRO drive mode the ve hicle may drop below the set desired speed in some situations e g on uphill grades Information WARNING The use of the system can lead to an in creased risk of accidents in the following situa tions gt On windin
53. approx 5 ft 1 50 m gt By the corner sensors at ap prox 24 in 60 cm Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Controls gt With parking assistant by the side sensors at approx 24 in 60 cm gt When a collision is imminent Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation Based on the limits of the sys tem it cannot independently react to all traffic situations There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the re spective situations lt WARNING Due to high speeds when PDC is acti vated the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage Avoid approaching an object too fast Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet active lt Overview Button in the vehicle Py PDC Park Distance Control Ultrasound sensors Ultrasound sensors of the PDC e g in the bumpers Functional requirements To ensure full functionality gt Do not cover sensors e g with stickers bicycle racks gt Keep the sensors clean and free of ice To clean when using high pressure washers do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm Switching on off Switching on automatically PDC switches on automatica
54. automati cally activated after departure if the function was switched on the last time the engine was stopped Switching on off manually Press button The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off all systems are now switched on Configure INDIVIDUAL depending on the equipment version the Intelligent Safety sys tems can be individually configured The indi vidual settings are activated and stored for the profile currently used As soon as a setting is changed on the menu all settings of the menu are activated the button lights up orange Press button repeatedly It is switched between the following settings ALL ON All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions INDIVIDUAL the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in dividually switched off Press and hold this button All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off 154 Status Press button Button lights up green all Intelli gent Safety systems are switched on Button lights up orange some In telligent Safety systems are switched off or settings for the sub functions were changed Button does not light up all Intel ligent Safety systems are switched off Setting the warning time About iDrive My Vehicle Vehi
55. belt and the driver s door are opened while the vehicle is standing still gt Ifthe system has not detected objects for an extended period e g on a road with very little traffic without curb or shoulder markings gt Ifthe detection range of the radar is dis rupted e g by dirt or heavy fog gt After a longer stationary period when the vehicle has been braked to a stop by the system Maintaining storing and changing the speed Information WARNING The desired speed can be incorrectly ad justed or called up by mistake There is risk of an accident Adjust the desired speed to the 170 traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and ac tively interfere in the respective situations lt WARNING Risk of accident due to too high speed differences to other vehicles e g in the follow ing situations gt When fast approaching a slowly moving vehicle gt Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own lane gt When fast approaching standing vehicles There is risk of injuries or danger to life Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the re spective situations lt Maintaining storing the speed Press button Or SET Do Press the rocker switch while the system is in terrupted e When the system is switched on the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed This is displayed in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster refer to page 172
56. cause a sudden drop in tire inflation pressure There is risk of an accident Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight CAUTION Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam age There is risk of property damage Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area lt WARNING Loose objects in the car s interior can be thrown into the car s interior while driving e g in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers There is risk of inju ries Secure loose objects in the car s inte rior lt Determining the load limit 1 Locate the following statement on your ve hicle s placard gt The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg w a or YYY Ibs Otherwise damage to the vehicle and unstable driving situations may result M Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca pacity For example if the YYY amount equals 1 000 Ibs and there will be four 150 Ibs passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 Ibs 1 000 Ibs minus 600 Ibs 400 Ibs Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi cle That
57. clear during opening and closing lt In order to prevent uncontrolled closing of the windows press the safety switch e g if chil dren or animals are carried in the rear Switching on and off Press button The LED lights up if the safety func tion is switched on Roller sunblinds General information The safety switch refer to page 71 in the driv er s door can be used to prevent children e g from operating the roller sunblinds using the switches in the rear BMW Touch Command The roller sunblinds can also be operated us ing BMW Touch Command Information If you are no longer able to move the roller sun blinds after having activated them consecu tively a number of times the system is blocked for a limited time to prevent overheating Let the system cool The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low interior temperatures 72 Roller sunblind in the rear window Overview Driver s door Button for the roller sunblind in the gt eel rear window Rear doors a Button for the roller sunblind in the gt rear window Controls Press the button to open the closed seal roller sunblind or to close the open roller sunblind If the button is pressed again during the move ment the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo site direction Hold the button down to operate the roller sun blinds on the rear window and on the side win dows at the same time Online Edit
58. continues to shift automatically Example once maximum engine speed is at tained M S manual mode is automatically up shifted as needed Switching to manual mode gt To shift down press the selector lever for ward gt To shift up pull the selector lever rear wards Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds for example downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster followed by the currently se lected gear Steptronic Sport transmission prevent automatic upshifting in M S manual mode If drive mode SPORT refer to page 111 is se lected the Steptronic Sport transmission does not automatically upshift in M S manual mode once the maximum speed is reached In addition there is no downshift for kickdown With the respective transmission version the lowest possible gear can be selected by simul taneously operating the kickdown and the left shift paddle However this effect is not pro duced via the shift paddles when switching briefly from selector lever position D to manual mode Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving Controls Ending the sport program manual mode Push the selector lever to the right D is displayed in the instrument cluster Shift paddles The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steeri
59. controller to the right New display is opened Vehicle settings System settings Driver profiles Vehicle status Technology in action Driving information White arrows pointing to the left or right indi cate that additional panels can be opened Opening recently used menus The recently used menus can be displayed e Press button twice o00 Opening Options menu Press button OPTION The Options menu is displayed The Options menu consists of different areas gt Screen settings e g Split screen gt Control options for the selected main menu e g for Media Radio gt If applicable further operating options for the selected menu e g Save station Changing settings 1 Selecta field 23 Ataglance GELEE iDrive 2 Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed J Relative to active audio source PDC Gong speed volume 3 Press the controller Activating deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box The checkbox indicates whether the func tion is activated or deactivated Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the func tion BY Function is activated C Function is deactivated Entering letters and numbers General information Letters and numbers can be entered using the controller or the touchscreen The keyboard s display changes automatically Entry 1 Turn the controller select l
60. corresponding seat position is performed automatically 88 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Adjusting Controls Overview Front Massage function Rear Massage function Switching on Via the iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Seat comfort Select desired seat Seat massage Level i Op MOS pW e oS Select intensity 1 3 Using the button Whole body training is started Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Press button once for each massage level The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit Switch off Via the iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Seat comfort Select desired seat Seat massage Level OFF e o pE YS Using the button ts Press and hold the button until the sll LEDs go out Adjusting the massage program About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Seat comfort Select desired seat Seat massage a ee i Select desired setting BMW Touch Command Operation of the massage function is also pos sible via BMW Touch Command Captain s chair The concept The Captain s chair offers maximum legroom and increased traveling comfort to the rear passenger on the front passenger s side 89 Controls Adjusting General information The following settings are applied to the seat automatically on system activation gt The front passenger s seat moves forward and adjusts the height
61. display goes out Temperature distribution The heating action in the seat cushion and backrest can be distributed in different ways About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Climate functions wpa Seat and armrest heating 91 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Adjusting 5 Select desired seat 6 Pres the controller and turn to set the tem perature distribution Switching armrest heating on off About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Climate functions Seat and armrest heating Select desired seat St SS SS Heat up armrest together with seat Active seat ventilation The concept The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are cooled by means of integrated fans The ventilation cools the seat e g if the vehi cle interior is overheated or for continuous cooling at high temperatures Overview Front Active seat ventilation 92 Active seat ventilation Switching on al Press button once for each ventilation level Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli mate control display After a short time the system automatically moves down one level in order to prevent ex cessive cooling Switch off al Press button and hold until bar display on the climate control display goes out Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Transporting children safely Controls Transporting children safely Vehic
62. driver is assisted by an automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous forewarning Brake intervention City braking function The warning prompts the driver himself herself to react During a warning the maximum brak ing force is used when the brake is actuated Premise is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal The system can additionally assist possibly with automatic braking intervention if there is risk of a collision At low speeds the vehicle can be decelerated to a complete stop The braking intervention takes place up to ap prox 50 mph 80 km h The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac tively moving the steering wheel Object detection can be restricted Limitations of the detection range and functional restric tions are to be considered With radar sensor and Active Cruise Control braking intervention The warning prompts the driver himself herself to react During a warning the maximum brak ing force is used when the brake is actuated Premise is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal The system can assist with automatic braking intervention if there is risk of a collision The intervention can bring the vehicle to a complete stop The braking interventio
63. driving e g in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive ma neuvers There is risk of injuries Always close the glove compartment immediately after us ing It lt Opening Pull the handle Closing Fold cover closed Compartments in the doors WARNING Breakable object e g glass bottle can break in the event of an accident Broken glass can be scattered in the car s interior There is 226 risk of injuries Do not stow any breakable ob jects in the car s interior lt Storage compartment on the center console Opening s Push the cover forward until it engages behind the cup holders Push the cover forward again until it engages behind the storage compart ment Closing Touch the cover on the handle bar It slides up to the cup holders toward the back Another touch closes the storage compartment com pletely Storage compartment in the rear center console The rear center console contains a storage compartment Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Storage compartments Controls Storage compartment in the Closing rear Press cover down until it engages Opening Rear Overview A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats Opening Depending on the equipment one of the fol lowing variants is installed Push the cover up until it engages There is a storage compartment underneath Closing Press the cover upward t
64. func tion BY Function is activated C Function is deactivated 25 Ataglance GEIE U E iDrive Entering letters and numbers General information Letters and numbers can be entered using the controller or the touchscreen The keyboard s display changes automatically Symbol Function l Tapping the symbol delete the let ter or number l lt Tapping the symbol for an extended period delete all letters or numbers Switching between cases letters and numbers Symbol Function ABC Enter the letters 14 Enter the numbers ABC or Change between capital and abc lower case letters Operating navigation map The navigation map can be moved with the touchscreen Function Controls Enlarge shrink Drag in or out with the fin map gers Rotate map Move fingers in a circle Touchpad General information Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller 26 Selecting functions 1 My Vehicle System settings Touchpad Pw N Select desired setting gt Speller enter letters and numbers gt Interactive map viewing the interac tive map gt Browser enter Internet addresses Search fields write letters without selecting the list field gt Audio feedback pronounces entered letters and numbers gt Two finger scrolling operate lists Entering letters and numbers Entering letters requires some practice at the beginning When enter
65. garage door opener re places up to 3 different hand held transmitters To operate the remote control the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be program med with the desired functions The hand held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control Before selling the vehicle delete the stored functions for the sake of security Information WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat ing remote controlled systems e g the garage door using the universal garage door opener There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam age Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during program ming and operation Also follow the safety in structions of the hand held transmitter Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packag N ing or in the instructions of the system to be controlled the system is gener ally compatible with the universal garage door opener If you have any questions please contact gt Adealer s service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop gt www homelink com on the Internet HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation Controls on the interior rearview mirror Buttons arrow 1 gt LED arrow 2 The hand held transmitter arrow 3 is re quired for programming Programming General information 1 Turn on operations 2 Initial setup Press and hol
66. gt Close all windows and the glass sunroof gt Greatly increase the air flow from the vents gt Drive moderately Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Things to remember when driving Hot exhaust system WARNING During driving operation high tempera tures can occur underneath the body e g caused by the exhaust gas system If combus tible materials such as leaves or grass come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas system these materials can ignite There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driving opera tion idle or during parking Do not touch the hot exhaust system lt Mobile communication devices in the vehicle WARNING Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can influence one another There is radiation due to the send operations of mobile phones There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam age If possible in the car s interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual disturbance and deflect the radiation from the car s interior Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between
67. gt Trunk lid secured arrow 1 vem e makineci a gt Unlocking locking of the vehicle row 2 Convenient closing gt gt Opening closing the tailgate individually gt Open close trunk lid with no touch activa Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position This on secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the central locking system gt Start the engine This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked Functional requirements using valet service The remote control can be l handed out without the integrated key gt There are no external sources of interfer ence nearby Emergency unlocking gt To lock the vehicle the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle near the doors gt The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx 2 seconds gt The engine can only be started if the re mote control is in the vehicle Pull the handle inside the trunk The trunk lid unlocks 65 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Opening and closing Unlocking Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely arrow This corresponds to pressing gj the remote control button Locking The driver s door must be closed Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a closed vehicle door arrow with your finger for approx one second without grasping the door handle This corresponds to pressing the remote control button Conveni
68. in the vehicle 235 Mobility System 260 Modifications technical see Own Safety 7 307 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Moisture in headlight 282 Monitor see Control Dis play 21 Mounting of child restraint systems 94 Moving sun visor 217 Multifunction steering wheel buttons 14 Multimedia 6 N Navigation 6 Near field communication 42 Neck restraints front see Head restraints 82 Neck restraints rear see Head restraints 83 Neutral cleaner see wheel cleaner 293 New wheels and tires 258 NFC see near field commu nication 42 Night Vision 147 Night Vision device see Night Vision 147 Nylon rope for tow starting towing 289 O OBD Onboard Diagnosis 280 OBD see OBD Onboard Di agnosis 280 Object detection see Night Vision 147 Octane rating see Recom mended fuel grade 252 Odometer 123 Oil 273 Oil adding 274 Oil additives 275 Oil change 275 Oil change interval service requirements 119 Oil filler neck 274 308 Oil types alternative 275 Oil types suitable 275 Old batteries disposal 285 Onboard computer Control Display 125 On board computer instru ment cluster 122 Onboard monitor see Control Display 21 Onboard vehicle tool kit 281 Opening and closing 54 Opening the trunk lid with no touch activation 66 Opening via door lock 62 Opening without remote con trol 62 Opening with remote control closi
69. indicator drops to 37 F 3 C or lower a signal sounds A Check Control message is displayed There is an increased risk of ice on roads WARNING Even at temperatures above 37 F 3 C there can be a danger of icy roads e g on bridges or shady sections of road There is risk of an accident Adjust your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures Time The time is displayed in the instrument cluster Setting the time and time format refer to page 38 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Displays Controls Service requirements The concept After switching on the drive ready state the in strument cluster briefly displays available driv ing distance or time to the next scheduled maintenance A service advisor can read out the current service requirements from your remote con trol Some information regarding the service re quirements can also be shown on the remote control with display Display Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re quired can be displayed on the Control Dis play About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle status 3 Go Service required Required maintenance procedures and le gally mandated inspections are displayed 4 Select an entry to call up detailed informa tion Symbols Sym Description bols No service is currently required OK A H Entering appointment dates En
70. interference the vehicle can also be unlocked and locked from the outside with out remote control refer to page 62 For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is gov erned by the following FCC ID LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS LX8CAS2 MYTCAS4 Compliance statement Y yY y Ny y This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful inter ference and gt this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 62 Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Without remote control From the outside WARNING For some country specific variants un locking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge If people must spend a longer time in the vehi cle while it is very hot or cold outside there is risk of injuries or danger to life Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it lt CAUTION The door lock is permanently joined with the door The door handle can be moved When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted paint or key can be damaged There is risk of property damage Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handl
71. is sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Controls Information Camera WARNING Indicators and warnings do not relieve from the personal responsibility Due to sys tem limits warnings or reactions of the system may not be output or they may be output too late or incorrectly There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi tions Watch traffic closely and actively inter fere in the respective situations The camera is installed near the interior rear view mirror WARNING Due to system limits individual functions can malfunction during tow starting towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated e g approach control warning with light brak Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear ing function There is risk of an accident Switching on off Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow starting towing lt Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every Overview driving off Button in the vehicle Switching on off manually Press button The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off all systems are now switched on Configure INDIVIDUAL depending on the equipment version the Intell
72. it engages be hind the cup holders Push the cover for 217 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Interior equipment ward again until it engages behind the stor age compartment wAY V Grasp the insert on the side and pull it out 218 Rear Opening Press on the cover arrow Emptying A D SD Grasp the insert on the side arrows and re move it SS Lighter Information WARNING Contact with hot heating elements or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the respective objects There is risk of fire and injuries Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle Make sure that children do not use the ciga rette lighter and do not burn themselves e g by carrying the remote control along when ex iting the vehicle Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Interior equipment CAUTION With rear console If metal objects fall into the socket they g can cause a short circuit There is risk of prop erty damage Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket Front center console Slide the cover rearward The cigarette lighter is located between the cup holders Controls Push in the lighter The lighter can be removed as The cigarette lighter is located between the i soon as it pops back out
73. lid 64 Eng ise Auto Start Stop function 98 19 Glove compartment 226 1 Control Display 21 3 A Hazard warning system 286 2 Fan 206 Intelligent Safety 139 D NFC antenna 43 16 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Cockpit Ataglance a glance 4 Glove compartment 225 HDC Hill Descent Control 165 5 Radio Multimedia Air suspension 200 6 Automatic climate control 203 Controller with buttons 22 NI l 10 Driving Dynamics Control 110 8 Parking brake 100 Automatic Hold 101 ee AUTOH 9 P yj PDC Park Distance Control 180 A Without Surround View rearview camera 184 Surround View 187 Cross traffic warning 197 DSC Dynamic Stability Con RIPE Ale Parking assistant 193 trol 163 oO Surround View Panorama 5 View 187 11 Steptronic transmission selector lever 106 17 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GEE g Cockpit All around the roofliner i 1 N Intelligent Emergency Re 5 Open rear sliding visor 74 SOS quest 286 2 Glass sunroof 73 Close rear sliding visor 74 a Indicator lamp front seat pas 6 Interior lights 133 AIRBAG senger airbag 138 Reading lights 133 2S A hp ibe Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Idle state operating and drive readiness Ataglance a glance idle state operating and drive readiness Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional
74. lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time Switch off drive readiness Steptronic transmission 1 Engage selector lever position P with the vehicle stopped 2 Press the Start Stop button The engine is switched off 97 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driving 3 Set the parking brake Before driving into a car wash So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob serve instructions for going into an automatic car wash refer to page 291 Auto Start Stop function The concept The Auto Start Stop function helps save fuel The system switches off the engine during a stop e g in traffic congestion or at traffic lights Drive readiness remains switched on The engine starts again automatically for driv ing off Information After every engine start via the Start Stop but ton the Auto Start Stop function is activated or deactivated according to the last setting refer to page 99 If the Auto Start Stop function is active it is available as soon as a speed of ap prox 3 mph approx 5 km h is exceeded Engine stop The engine is switched off automatically dur ing a stop under the following conditions gt The selector lever is in selector lever posi tion D gt The brake pedal remains pressed while the vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by Automatic Hold gt The driver s safety belt is buckled or the driver s door is closed
75. lights up gt Off the LED goes out The rearview camera cannot be switched off if the reverse gear is engaged Front camera Automatic deactivation during forward O travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded ay Q Switch the system back on if needed Display Overview Rearview camera Function bar Selection window There are two cameras at the bottom in the ex terior mirror housings Side view Automatic camera perspective The image quality may be impaired by dirt on the camera lenses Clean the camera lenses refer to page 294 Movable camera perspective Camera image Top View Switching on off ON OO RP WN Rearview camera Switching on automatically With the engine running engage lever in posi tion PR 188 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Controls Selecting the camera perspective General information The individual camera perspectives can be se lected in the selection window via iDrive Side view The side view can be selected for the right or left vehicle side This view helps when positioning the vehicle at the curb or with other obstacles on the side by displaying the side surroundings The side view looks from rear to front and in case of danger focuses automatically on pos sible obstacles Automatic camera perspective The automatic camera perspective sho
76. locks 96 Child seat mounting 94 Child seats 93 Chrome parts care 293 Cigarette lighter 218 Cleaning displays 294 Climate control 203 Climate control on roof liner 209 Clock 118 Closing the trunk lid with no touch activation 66 303 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Closing via door lock 62 Closing without remote con trol 62 Clothes hooks 229 Coasting 245 Coasting with engine decou pled coasting 245 Coasting with idling en gine 245 Collision warning with braking function 140 Collision warning with City braking function 140 Combination switch see Turn signals 103 Combination switch see Wiper system 103 Comfort Access 65 COMFORT drive mode see Driving Dynamics Con trol 110 COMFORT PLUS drive mode see Driving Dynamics Control 110 COMFORT PLUS see Driv ing Dynamics Control 110 COMFORT see Driving Dy namics Control 110 Communication 6 Compact wheel see Emer gency wheel 282 Compartments in the doors 226 Compatible devices 42 Compatible mobile phones 42 Compressor 260 Computer see on board computer 122 Condensation on win dows 206 Condensation under the vehi cle 236 Condition Based Service CBS 279 Confirmation signal 68 304 ConnectedDrive 6 ConnectedDrive Services 6 Connecting device 41 Connecting electrical devi ces 219 Connecting mobile phone 41 Connecting smartphone 41 Connecting telephon
77. move the backrest back up slightly so that the child restraint system rests lightly against the backrest Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap Mounting points rA The respective symbol shows the an Ws chor for the upper retaining strap Seats with an upper Top Tether are marked with this symbol It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf 95 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Transporting children safely Information CAUTION The mounting points for the upper re taining straps of child restraint systems are only provided for these retaining straps When other objects are mounted the anchors can be damaged There is risk of property damage Only mount child restraint systems to the up per retaining straps lt Retaining strap guide WARNING If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system the protec tive effect can be reduced There is risk of inju ries Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not guided across sharp edges and without twisting to the upper retaining strap lt Direction of travel Head restraint Hook for upper retaining strap Mounting point Rear window shelf Seat backrest NO oO fh WN Upper retaining strap Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1 Remove the mounting point cover 2 Raise the head restraint 3 Guide the upper retaining strap betwe
78. no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Breakdown assistance Preparation CAUTION In the case of body contact between the two vehicles a short circuit can occur during jump starting There is risk of property dam age Make sure that no body contact occurs lt 1 Check whether the battery of the other ve hicle has a voltage of 12 volts This infor mation can be found on the battery 2 Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle 3 Switch off any electronic systems power consumers in both vehicles Starting aid terminals WARNING If the jumper cables are connected in the incorrect order sparks formation can occur There is risk of injuries Pay attention to the correct order during connection lt The so called starting aid terminal in the en gine compartment acts as the battery s posi tive terminal Open the cover of the starting aid terminal 288 A special nut serves as the negative terminal of the battery Connecting the cables Before you begin switch off all unnecessary electronic systems power consumers such as the radio on the assisting and receiving vehi cles 1 Open the cover of the starting aid terminal 2 Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis tance 3 Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal
79. of the battery or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started 4 Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle 5 Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine 1 Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in creased idle speed 2 Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Breakdown assistance Mobility If the first starting attempt is not success ful wait a few minutes before making an other attempt in order to allow the dis charged battery to recharge 3 Let both engines run for several minutes 4 Disconnect the jumper cables in the re verse order Check the battery and recharge if needed Tow starting and towing Information WARNING Due to system limits individual functions can malfunction during tow starting towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated e g approach control warning with light brak ing function There is risk of an accident Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow starting towing lt Transporting the vehicle Informatio
80. of the automatic climate control Temperature Turn the ring to set the desired temperature The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible if needed by using the maximum cooling or heating ca pacity and then keeps it constant Do not rapidly switch between different tem perature settings The automatic climate con trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature The temperature can also be operated using BMW Touch Command Information ttt Symbol is displayed permanently on the display of the automatic climate control Manual air distribution The air distribution can be adjusted to individ ual needs H Press button repeatedly to select a mig program gt Upper body region gt Upper body region and footwell gt Footwell The air distribution can also be operated using BMW Touch Command Air flow manual To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro gram first a amp Press the left or right side of the but ton decrease or increase air flow Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Climate control Controls The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control The air flow can also be operated using BMW Touch Command Maximum cooling Press button MAX AIC The system is set to the lowest tem perature maximum air flow and air circulation mode Air flows out of the vents to the u
81. of the indicator played continuously and are not cleared and warning lights until the malfunction is eliminated If sev eral malfunctions occur at once the mes Supplementary text messages sages are displayed consecutively Additional information such as on the cause of These messages can be faded for approx an error or the required action can be called up 8 seconds After this time they are dis via Check Control played again automatically With urgent messages the added text will be gt Other Check Control messages are faded automatically displayed on the Control Display automatically after approx 20 seconds They are stored and can be displayed Functions again later Depending on the Check Control message the following functions can be selected Displaying stored Check Control messages About iDrive My Vehicle gt Owner s Manual Display additional information about the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner s Manual Vehicle status 1 2 gt Service request 3 Check Control A Contact a dealer s service center or an other qualified service center or repair Select the text message shop Messages after trip completion gt BMW Roadside Assistance Special messages displayed while driving are Contact Roadside Assistance displayed again after the drive readiness is switched off 117 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Displays Fuel gauge Instrument cluster
82. off the engine during longer stops e g at traffic lights railroad crossings or in traffic congestion Auto Start Stop function The Auto Start Stop function of your vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con stantly fuel consumption and emissions are reduced Savings can begin within a few sec onds of switching off the engine In addition fuel consumption is also deter mined by other factors such as driving style road conditions maintenance or environmental factors Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and reduce the range especially in city and stop and go traffic Switch off these functions if they are not needed The ECO PRO driving program supports the energy conserving use of comfort features These functions are automatically deactivated partially or completely Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life BMW recommends that maintenance work be performed by a BMW dealer s service center For information on the BMW Maintenance System refer to page 279 ECO PRO The concept ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption For this purpose the en gine control and comfort features e g
83. out of reach of children lt General information Establish idle state and safely park the vehicle before engine oil is added Overview The oil filler neck is located in the engine com partment refer to page 271 Opening the oil filler neck Only add engine oil when the message is dis played in the instrument cluster The quantity to be added is indicated in the message dis played in the instrument cluster 1 Opening the hood refer to page 272 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 2 Turn the oil filler neck counter clockwise arrow 3 Add motor oil Engine oil types to add Information CAUTION Oil additives can damage the engine There is risk of property damage Do not use oil additives lt CAUTION Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc tions in the engine or damage it There is risk of property damage When selecting an engine oil make sure that the engine oil has the cor rect viscosity grade lt The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine Viscosity grades When selecting an engine oil ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE OW 40 SAE OW 30 SAE 5W 40 SAE 5W 30 OW 20 or 5W 20 The viscosity grades OW 20 and 5W 20 are only suitable for particular engines Suitable engine oil types Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat ing standards Engine oil Gasoline engine BMW Longlife 01 BMW Longl
84. passenger seat see Children WARNING The ensure the front seat passenger air bag function it must be detected whether a person occupies the front passenger seat The entire seat cushion area must be used for this purpose There is risk of injuries or danger to life Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the floor area lt 138 Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults the front seat passenger airbags may be deac tivated in certain sitting positions In this case the indicator lamp for the front seat passenger airbags lights up In this case change the sitting position so that the front seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out If it is not possible to activate the airbags have the person sit in the rear To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion gt Do not attach covers cushions ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat gt Donot place any electronic devices on the passenger Seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it gt Donot place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below gt No moisture in or on the seat Indicator lamp for the front seat passenger airbags The indicator lamp for the front seat passen ger airbag in the roofliner indicate
85. s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time dependent maintenance pro cedures such as checking brake fluid and if necessary changing the engine oil and the mi crofilter activated charcoal filter Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty In formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod els for additional information on service re quirements The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Records of regu lar maintenance and repair work should be re tained 279 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Maintenance Socket for OBD Onboard trol components in particular the catalytic Diagnosis converter Information CAUTION Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis can lead to vehicle malfunctions There is risk of property damage The manu facturer of your vehicle strongly recommends access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer s service center another qualified service center or repair shop or other authorized persons lt Position ma 4 There is an OBD socket on the driver s side for checking the primary components in the vehi cle s emissi
86. seems to be un avoidable PreCrash functions are triggered The front end collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally the collision warning and braking are delayed in order to avoid false system re actions General information The system issues a two phase warning of a possible danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx 3 mph 5 km h Time of warnings may vary with the current driving sit uation Detection range It responds to objects if they are detected by the system Information WARNING Indicators and warnings do not relieve from the personal responsibility Due to sys tem limits warnings or reactions of the system may not be output or they may be output too late or incorrectly There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi tions Watch traffic closely and actively inter fere in the respective situations Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 WARNING Due to system limits individual functions can malfunction during tow starting towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated e g approach control warning with light brak ing function There is risk of an accident Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow starting towing lt Overview Button in the vehicle D Intelligent Safety V Camera The camera i
87. systems are now switched on Configure INDIVIDUAL depending on the equipment version the Intelligent Safety sys tems can be individually configured The indi vidual settings are activated and stored for the profile currently used As soon as a Setting is changed on the menu all settings of the menu are activated the button lights up orange Press button repeatedly It is switched between the following settings ALL ON All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on For the sub functions e g set ting for warning time basic settings are acti vated INDIVIDUAL the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in dividually switched off Press and hold this button All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off Collision warning with braking function The concept The system can help prevent accidents If an accident cannot be prevented the system will help reduce the collision speed The system sounds a warning before an immi nent collision and actuates brakes independ ently if needed The system is controlled using a camera If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise Control with Stop amp Go function ACC the Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Controls front end collision warning is additionally con trolled via the cruise control radar sensor Active Protection if a collision
88. ter a brief time With a change of the desired speed via the rocker switch on the steering wheel it is displayed briefly Desired speed Display in the speedometer gt Green marking system is active gt Marking is orange white the system has been paused gt Nomarking system is switched off Malfunction A message is displayed in the instrument clus ter HDC is not available e g due to elevated brake temperatures Integral Active Steering The concept Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac tive Steering and rear axle steering The system varies the steering angle of the wheels in relation to the steering wheel move ment Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving stability control systems Controls With strong steering movements and low speeds e g when parking the wheel angle Is magnified that is the steering is more direct The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a direction opposite to the front wheels At higher speeds the rear wheels are turned in the same direction as the front wheels In critical driving situations the Integral Active Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur poseful steering of the rear wheels before the driver intervenes e g in case of oversteering General information The system offers several different tunings These are assigned to the different driving modes of
89. the front passenger side Controls Move index finger forward and backward in the direction of the screen Swipe with the hand across the width of the Control Dis play in the direction of the front passenger side Slowly move forearm in a circular pattern with the index finger stretched out forward Gestures are detected after one circular motion Slowly move forearm in a circular pattern with the index finger stretched out forward Gestures are detected after one circular motion Pinch with thumb and index finger and move hand hori zontally to the right or left Move stretched out index and middle finger forward About iDrive My Vehicle Gestures i a O E Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 System settings Function Accept call Confirm Check Con trol message Reject call Close popup Increasing the vol ume Reducing the volume Surround View turn camera view Individually assigna ble gesture Assigning gesture individually Function assignment Select desired setting 31 Ataglance EEIE BMW gesture control System limits Gesture recognition by the camera can be dis turbed by the following circumstances gt The camera objective is covered gt The camera objective is contaminated Clean the camera lenses refer to page 294 gt The gesture is executed outside of the de tection range gt The gesture can only be executed while
90. the Driving Dynamics Control refer to page 110 Tuning Drive mode Integral Active Steering COMFORT E comfortable for optimal CO PRO travel comfort SPORT dynamic for greater agility Using snow chains Information When snow chains are in use refer to page 264 rear wheel steering is deactivated Malfunction In the event of a malfunction the steering wheel must be turned further while the vehicle responds more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the higher speed range The stability enhancing intervention may be deactivated Proceed cautiously and drive defensively Have the system checked 167 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driver assistance systems Driver assistance systems Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Active Cruise Control with Stop amp Go function ACC The concept Use this system to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear roads To the extent possible the system automati cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle
91. the back in the shoulder area gt Results in a relaxed seating position gt Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles Folding the footrest out in Press the upper lower section of the switch The footrest on the backrest of the front passenger seat is folded out in The distance between the front passenger seat and the rear seat must be sufficiently large to unfold the footrest Adjusting the front passenger seat from the rear The concept The front passenger seat can be operated from the rear e g to increase the legroom in the rear General information With the button for adjusting the Shoulder support refer to page 79 it is possible to set the angle of the screen in the rear on the pas senger side 79 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Adjusting Adjusting Va z VNE 2 1 Press button 2 Adjust the passenger seat e g forward back 2 3 Press the button to deactivate the function The function deactivates itself automatically after some time Resetting to standard position EE xo e Press button to reset to standard po sition The process is canceled if the button is pressed again Safety belts Seats with safety belt The vehicle has four or five seating positions each of which is equipped with a safety belt 80 General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off For
92. the interior rearview mir ror Activating deactivating Y The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released gt Normal wiper speed tap up once The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary gt Fast wiper speed tap up twice or tap once Press button on the wiper lever Oey ong ME resIstanice poni Wiping is started If the vehicle is equipped Wipers change to normal speed when ve with a rain sensor LED in wiper lever lights up hicle comes to standstill When wipers are frozen to windshield wiper i i tion is deactivated Switch off and brief wipe operation Is deactivate f During trip interruption with the rain sensor switched on if the trip is resumed within ap prox 15 minutes the rain sensor is automati cally activated again CAUTION If the rain sensor is activated the wipers can accidentally start moving in car washes There is risk of property damage Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released gt Single wipe press down once gt To switch off from normal wiper speed press down once gt To switch off from fast wiper speed press down twice Intermittent operation or rain sensor The concept Without the rain sensor the frequency of the wiper operation is preset 104 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving Controls
93. the occupants safety the belt locking mechanism triggers early Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection they are not a substitute for safety belts The upper shoulder strap s anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted gt The two outer safety belt buckles integrated into the rear seat are for pas sengers sitting on the left and right gt The center rear safety belt buckle is solely intended for the center passenger Information WARNING If the safety belt is used by more than one person the protective effect of the safety belt cannot be ensured anymore There is risk of injuries or danger to life Do not allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt Infants and children are not allowed in an occu pant s lap but must be transported and re spectively secured in designated child restraint systems lt WARNING The protective effect of the safety belts can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas tened incorrectly An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries e g in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers There is risk of injuries or danger to life Make sure that all occupants are wearing safety belts correctly lt Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Adjusting Controls Correct use of
94. the respective door pillar is switched off Setting the brightness About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Lighting Accent lighting in rear ae SS Brightness The last brightness set is displayed 6 Select desired setting Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Lights Controls Touch sensor The ambient light accent is fitted with a touch sensor The ambient highlight is switched on or off with a brief touch of the chrome bar The brightness is changed with a long touch BMW Touch Command The ambient highlight can also be operated using BMW Touch Command 135 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Safety Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to Airbags Le a FN 1 Front airbag driver 2 Front airbag front passenger 3 Head airbag Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide ad equate restraint the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems 4 Side airbag 5 Knee airbag Side airbag In a la
95. the system intervenes with a brief active steer ing intervention and helps to return the vehicle into the lane The steering intervention can be noticed on the steering wheel and can be man ually overridden at any time The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone Brief flashing of the lamp A brief flashing of the lamp during vehicle un locking serves as system self test System limits Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations gt When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own gt In heavy fog rain or snowfall gt In tight curves or on narrow lanes gt Ifthe bumper is dirty or iced up or covered with stickers For vehicles with side collision warning the steering intervention can be limited e g in the following situation gt Inthe event of missing worn poorly visi ble merging diverging or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas gt When lane markings are covered in snow ice dirt or water gt When the lane markings are not white When the lane markings are covered by objects gt When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you gt If there are constant blinding effects be cause of oncoming light e g from the sun low in the sky gt When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over dirty or cov
96. the vehicle and endanger themselves and traffic e g with the following actions gt Pressing the Start Stop button Releasing the parking brake Opening and closing of doors or windows Shifting the selector lever into neutral VV V OV Using vehicle equipment 100 There is risk of accidents or injuries Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve hicle Carry remote control along when exiting and lock the vehicle Overview H a O Parking brake Setting Pull the switch f LED on the switch lights up park he indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up red The parking brake is set While driving Use as emergency brake while driving Pull the switch and hold it The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled park The indicator lamp lights up red a sig nal sounds and the brake lights light up A Check Control message is displayed If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap prox 2 mph 3 km h the parking brake is set Releasing With drive readiness switched on Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving Controls O Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set The LED and indicator lamp go out The parking brake is released Automatic release The parking brake is released automatically when you drive away The LED and indicator lamp go out Automatic Hold The concept
97. the vehicle is stationary 32 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Voice activation system Ataglance a glance Voice activation system Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems The concept gt Most functions displayed on the Control Display can be operated by voice com mands via the voice activation system The system supports you with announcements during input gt Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the voice activation system gt The system uses a special microphone on the driver s side gt Verbal instructions in the Owner s Manual to use with the voice activation system Requirements Via the Control Display set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the sooken commands can be identi fied Set the language refer to page 38 Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system 8 iF Press button on the steering wheel 2 Wait for the signal 3 Say the command A command that is recognized
98. the vehicle or the EDR Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Information Vehicle identification number R A The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in jury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration NHTSA in addition to notifying BMW of North America LLC P O Box 1227 West wood New Jersey 07675 1227 Telephone 1 800 831 1117 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or BMW of North America LLC To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washing ton DC 20590 You can also obtain other in 10 formation about motor vehicle safety from http Awww safercar gov For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety related defect
99. tires often for damage foreign objects lodged in the tread and tread wear 258 Information Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces as well as debris curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels tires and suspension parts This is more likely to occur with low profile tires which provide less cush ioning between the wheel and the road Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed especially if your vehicle is equipped with low profile tires Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal functions gt Unusual vibrations while driving gt Unusual handling such as a strong ten dency to pull to the left or right Damage can e g be caused by driving over curbs road damage or similar things WARNING Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure which can lead to loss of vehicle control There is risk of an accident If tire dam age is suspected while driving immediately re duce speed and stop Have wheels and tires checked For this purpose drive carefully to the nearest dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Have vehicle towed or transported as needed lt WARNING Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure which can lead to loss of vehicle control There is risk of an accident Do not re pair damaged tires but have them replaced Changing wheels and tires Mounting Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out
100. traffic alert 5 Crossing traffic warning Radar sensors 4 Switching on automatically O If the system is activated on the Control Dis play it is automatically switched on as soon as PDC or Panorama View is active Switching off automatically The system is automatically switched off in the following situations gt When exceeding a speed of ap The radar sensors are located in the rear prox 4 mph 7 km h bumper gt With the steering and lane guidance assis tant active when a certain driving distance is exceeded 198 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Display Yellow lines arrow 2 mark the front or rear edge of the own vehicle Lamp in the exterior mirror Acoustic warning In addition to the optical indicator a warning signal sounds if the own vehicle moves into the respective direction System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations If th fth hing vehicle i Thelanpiniie srenorminarischesiven gt A Pern APPO ATUNSE high cles are detected by the rear sensors and the e vehicle is moving backwards gt In heavy fog rain or snowfall In tight curves Display in the PDC view gt Ifthe bumper is dirty or iced up or covered with stickers gt If crossing objects move at a very slow speed gt If other objects are in the capture range of the sensors that hide cross traffic The respective boundary
101. unlocking locking If the vehicle is locked from the outside the rear sliding visor is automatically closed During unlocking the sliding visor is automati cally traveled into the position where it was prior to locking Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Opening and closing Controls Pinch protection system If the closing force when closing the glass sun roof exceeds a certain value the closing move ment is stopped beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof or from the tilted position during closing The glass sunroof reopens slightly WARNING Body parts can be jammed on operating the glass sunroof There is risk of injuries Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos ing lt Closing from the open position without pinch protection If there is an external danger proceed as fol lows 1 Press the switch forward beyond the re sistance point and hold The pinch protection is limited and the glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin 2 Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the glass sunroof closes without jam protection Make sure that the closing area is clear Closing from the raised position without pinch protection If there is an external danger push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it The glass sunroof closes withou
102. using the respective features and systems BMW maintenance system The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the op erational reliability of the vehicle In some cases scopes and intervals may vary according to the country specific version Re placement work spare parts fuels and lubri cants and wear materials are calculated sepa rately Further information is available from a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of your vehicle Based on this Condition Based Service recog nizes the maintenance requirements The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile Detailed information on service requirements refer to page 119 can be displayed on the Control Display Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control The dealer s service center can read this data out and suggest an optimized maintenance scope for your vehicle Therefore hand the service advisor the remote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count If this occurs have a dealer
103. vated For additional information refer to Parking lights low beams headlight control re fer to page 129 Lane departure warning 1 The system is activated At least one l A l V lane marking was detected and warn ings can be issued For additional information refer to Lane depar ture warning refer to page 150 Front fog lights Front fog lights are activated 40 For additional information refer to Front fog lights refer to page 132 High beam Assistant A High beam Assistant is switched on b High beams are activated and off auto matically as a function of the traffic sit uation For additional information refer to High beam Assistant refer to page 132 Automatic Hold Function is activated The vehicle is au AUTOH tomatically held in place when it is sta tionary For more information see Automatic Hold re fer to page 101 Blue lights High beams High beams are activated Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Displays Controls For additional information refer to High Hiding Check Control messages beams refer to page 103 z General lamps ii Check Control At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol Press and hold PC button on blinker lever in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con gt Some Check Control messages are dis trol message and the meaning
104. with the telephone or auxiliary phone function The phone connection quality is poor gt The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted depending on the mobile phone gt Insert the mobile phone into the snap in adapter or place it in the area of the center console gt Insert mobile phone into the wireless charging tray gt Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available con tact the hotline a dealer s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle Ataglance a glance Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle The concept The Integrated Owner s Manual can be dis played on the Control Display It specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle Components of the In
105. 100 mph 160 km h and for optimum driving comfort note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table refer to page 255 and adjust as necessary Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Wheels and tires Mobility A A These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver s door pillar Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph 160 km h Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph 160 km h 740Li 750i xDrive 750Li xDrive Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI Specificati i eiPSiwitheod ne tires V 245 50 R 18 100 V 2 2 32 M S A S RSC 245 50 R 18 100 H M S RSC 245 45 R 19 102V 2 4 35 M S XL A S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL RSC Front 245 45R19 2 5 36 98 Y RSC 25 36 Rear 275 40 R 19 101 Y RSC 2 4135 2 6 38 Front 245 40R20 2 71 39 99 Y XL RSC 27139 Rear 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI Front 245 35 R21 3 0 44 96 Y XL RSC 30 44 Rear 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel Speed up to a max of T 135 80 R 18104 50 mph 80 km h M 4 2160 Tire inflation pressures at max speeds above 100 mph 160 km h WARNING In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph 160 km h please observe and if necessary adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph 160 km h from the relevant table on the following pages Other wise tire damage and acciden
106. 15 Controls Safety The selected setting is stored for the drive pro file currently used Set force of the steering wheel vibration About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Steering wheel vibration 4 Select desired setting The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety systems and stored for the profile currently used Vehicles with side collision warning switching steering intervention on off The steering intervention can be switched on and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec tion and lane departure warning About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Intelligent Safety 4 Steering intervention The selected setting is stored for the drive pro file currently used Display in the instrument cluster I A Green symbol at least one lane mark Q ing was detected and warnings can be issued Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected the steering wheel begins vi brating If the turn signal is set before changing the lane a warning is not issued Vehicles with side collision warning if the vi brating steering wheel is ignored and the lane marking crossed the system intervenes with a 152 brief active steering intervention and helps to maintain the vehicle in the lane The steering intervention can be noticed on the steering wheel and can be manually overridden at any time End of warning The warning i
107. 15 iDrive Ataglance a glance 3 amp Owners Manual Deleting the button assignments 1 Press buttons 1 and 7 simultaneously for approx five seconds 2 OK Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance CEIC BMW gesture control BMW gesture control Vehicle features and options The gestures are captured by a camera in the roofliner This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This e n also applies to safety related functions and Activation deactivation systems The respectively applicable country About iDrive provisions must be observed when using the Perform gestures underneath the interior mir ror respective features and systems 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings 3 Gestures The concept 4 Gesture control Several iDrive functions can be operated using BMW gesture control Adjusting gt Display tips the possible gesture is Overview ae 7 shown on the Control Display gt Audio feedback an acoustic signal is outputted once the gesture is recognized Je AS a 30 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 BMW gesture control BASEE IE Possible gestures Gesture Execute gestures clearly The gestures can also be executed on
108. 178 Pe s J Rear bumper Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra dar sensors clean and unobstructed Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Controls Camera The camera is installed near the interior rear view mirror Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear Functional requirements gt Speed below 130 mph 210 km h gt Sufficient lane width gt Above approx 43 mph 70 km h lane marking on both sides is detected gt Below approx 43 mph 70 km h lane marking on both sides or a vehicle driving ahead is detected gt Atleast one hand on the steering wheel rim Wide curves Drive in the center of the lane Turn signal not actuated VV VV Camera calibration immediately after vehi cle delivery is completed Switching on off Switching on RB Press button on the steering wheel Or Steering wheel symbol lights up gray System activates automatically as soon as all function conditions are fulfilled refer to page 179 Steering wheel symbol lights up green The system is active With the system switched on pedestrian warn ing and side collision warning are active Set tings on the Control Display remain un changed Switch off PRB Press button on the steering wheel 40 The indicator goes out The system does not manipulate steering Automatic interruption The sy
109. 63 Automatic transmission see Steptronic transmis sion 106 Automatic unlocking 68 AUTO program automatic cli mate control 204 AUTO program intensity 204 Auto Start Stop function 98 Average fuel consump tion 124 Average speed 124 Axle loads weights 299 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Backrest curvature see Lum bar support 77 Backrest seats 76 Backrest width 77 Band aids see First aid kit 287 Bar for tow starting towing 289 Basic position rear seats 80 Battery replacement vehicle battery 284 Battery replacement vehicle remote control 55 Battery vehicle 284 Being towed see tow start ing towing 289 Belts safety belts 80 Beverage holder cu pholder 228 Blinds sun protection 72 Bluetooth connection 42 BMW Assist 6 BMW display key 55 BMW Driver s Guide App 6 BMW gesture control 30 BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance sys tem 279 BMW Touch Command 36 Bonus range ECO PRO 243 Bottle holder see Cu pholder 228 Brake assistant 163 Brake assistant adaptive 163 Brake discs break in 234 Brake force display 160 Brake lights adaptive 160 Brake lights brake force dis play 160 Brake pads break in 234 Braking hints 235 Breakdown assistance 286 Break in 234 Brightness of Control Dis play 39 Bulb replacement 282 Bulb replacement front 282 Bulb replacement front lamps 282 Bulb replacement rear 282 Bulb re
110. 65 Emergency wheel 282 Energy control 123 Energy recovery 123 Engine automatic Start Stop function 98 Engine automatic switch on off 98 Engine compartment 271 Engine compartment work Ing in 272 Engine coolant 277 Engine idling when driving coasting 245 Engine oil 273 Engine oil adding 274 Engine oil additives 275 Engine oil change 275 Engine oil filler neck 274 Engine oil temperature 118 Engine oil types suitable 275 Engine start during malfunc tion 55 Engine start jump start ing 287 Engine start see drive readi ness 97 Engine stopping see drive readiness 97 Engine temperature 118 Entering a car wash 291 Entertainment 6 Equipment interior 215 Error displays see Check Control 114 ESP Electronic Stability Pro gram see DSC 163 Exchanging wheels tires 258 Executive Drive Pro 201 Exhaustion warner 161 Exhaust system 235 Exterior lighting during un locking 60 Exterior mirror automatic dimming feature 86 Exterior mirrors 85 External start 287 External temperature dis play 118 External temperature warn ing 118 Eyes for securing cargo 238 F Failure message see Check Control 114 False alarm see Unintentional alarm 70 Fan see Air flow 205 Filler neck for engine oil 274 Fine wood care 293 First aid kit 287 Fitting for towing see tow starting towing 289 Flat tire changing wheels 282 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 268 Flat tire repairing 260 Flat tire
111. As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pres sure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel ef ficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi 268 cator to indicate when the system is not oper ating properly The TPMS malfunction indica tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunc tion the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi nated This sequence will continue upon sub sequent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfu
112. Control Display are shown in green and Tire Pressure Monitor active For recommended pressures see tire pressure label is displayed You may interrupt this trip at any time When you continue the reset resumes automatically Messages Required tire inflation pressure check message i A Check Control message is displayed 265 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Wheels and tires gt Thesystem has detected a wheel change but no reset was done gt Noreset was performed for the system The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures before the last reset gt Inflation was not carried out according to specifications gt The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset In these cases 1 Check the tire pressure and correct as needed 2 Reset the system Message in case of low tire pressure A Check Control message is displayed gt There is a tire inflation pressure loss i The yellow warning lamp lights up gt No reset was performed for the system The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures before the last reset In these cases 1 Reduce your speed and drive moderately Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph 130 km h 2 Atthe next opportunity e g gas station check and if necessary correct the tire in flation pressure in all four tires 3 Reset the system Message in c
113. Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Displays gt Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency After leav ing the area of the interference the system automatically becomes active again gt TPM could not conclude the reset perform the reset of the system again gt Awheel without TPM electronics ts mounted Have it checked by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed gt Malfunction Have system checked imme diately by a dealer s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop For more information see Tire Pressure Moni tor refer to page 264 Steering system Steering system in some cases not amp working Have steering system checked imme diately by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Engine functions Engine function disturbed Have vehi cle checked immediately by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop For additional information refer to On board Diagnostics socket refer to page 280 Green lights Turn signal Turn signal switched on Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed For additional information refer to Turn signal refer to page 103 116 Parking lights headlight control _____ Parking lights or headlights are acti 2DQ
114. HDC Hill Descent Con trol 165 Head airbags 136 Headlight control auto matic 130 Headlight courtesy delay fea ture 130 Headlight courtesy delay fea ture via remote control 61 Headlight flasher 103 Headlight glass 282 Headlights care 292 Head restraint pillows 84 Head restraints 76 Head restraints front 82 Head restraints rear 83 Head up Display 126 Head up Display care 294 Heating see Parked car heat ing 209 Heavy cargo stowing 238 High beam Assistant 132 High beams 103 High beams low beams see High beam Assistant 132 Hill Descent Control HDC 165 Hills 236 Hill start assistant see Drive off assistant 163 Holder for beverages 228 Homepage 6 Hood 272 Horn 14 Hotel function trunk lid 65 Hot exhaust system 235 HUD Head up Display 126 Hydroplaning 235 iBrake Post Crash 161 Ice warning see External temperature warning 118 Icy roads see External tem perature warning 118 Identification marks tires 256 Identification number see ve hicle identification num ber 10 Idle state operating and drive readiness 19 iDrive 21 Ignition key see Remote con trol 54 Indication of a flat tire 266 269 Indicator and alarm lamps see Check Control 114 Indicator lamp see Check Control 114 Individual air distribution 205 Individual settings see pro files 58 Inflation pressure tires 254 Inflation pressure warning FTM tires 268 Information 6 Initialize Tire Pressu
115. Instrument panel Onboard info Select desired setting ae FY YS Press and hold PC button on blinker lever The respective information is displayed in the instrument cluster 122 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Information in detail Display Odometer and trip odometer Display gy 7 serene Tica tits tals Wl Wa aaa ene E CHARGE T gt Current fuel consumption arrow 2 y 3 128509 gt Energy recovery arrow 1 gt Average consumption arrow 3 gt Odometer arrow 1 gt Trip odometer arrow 2 Energy recovery The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted into electric energy during coasting overrun Display reset miles pone mode The vehicle battery is partially charged Press the knob and fuel consumption can be reduced gt With drive readiness switched off time external Current fuel consumption temperature and odometer The current fuel consumption displays the cur are displayed rent consumption of fuel Check whether you gt When drive readiness is switched on the are currently driving in an efficient and environ trip odometer is reset mentally friendly manner Range Energy recovery and current fuel consumption The concept Current range and total range can be displayed The concept as bar displays in the onboard computer Energy recovery and current fuel consumption can be displayed as bar displays in the on Displa board co
116. LED goes out The function deactivates itself automatically after some time BMW Touch Command The front passenger seat can also be operated using BMW Touch Command 78 Rear seats General information The seats in the rear can be used using the seat adjustment switch in the center armrest or via BMW Touch Command Information WARNING There is a risk of jamming when folding down the center armrest in the rear There is risk of injuries Make sure that the area of movement of the center armrest is clear during folding down Electrically adjustable seats Overview e Se S 7 6 5 Resetting to standard position Head restraint shoulder support Lumbar support Folding the footrest out in Forward backward tilt ooh ORN Backrest 7 Adjust front passenger seat If the safety switch refer to page 71 is pressed the seats cannot be adjusted Adjustments in detail gt Forward back Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Adjusting Shoulder support gt Seat tilt Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re gion of the spine The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture gt Press the front rear section of the switch The curvature is increased decreased gt Press the upper lower sec tion of the switch The curvature is shifted up down Also supports
117. Owner s Manual for Vehicle The Ultimate Driving Machine THE BMW 7 SERIES OWNER S MANUAL BMW EfficientDynamics Less emissions More driving pleasure Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Information Provided by D E ANL SR 7 Series Owner s Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW The more familiar you are with your vehicle the better control you will have on the road We therefore strongly suggest Read this Owner s Manual before starting off in your new BMW Also use the Integrated Owner s Manual in your vehicle It con tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW The manual also contains information designed to en hance operating reliability and road safety and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner s Handbook for Vehicle Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro chures in the onboard literature We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride BMW AG The Owner s Manual is available in many countries as an app Additional information on the Internet www bomw com bmw_drivers_guide Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich Germany Reprinting including excerpts only with the written consent of BMW
118. PDC the parking assistant and the rear view camera and react accordingly A component of the system is the PDC Park Distance Control refer to page 180 Information Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC s signal tone 193 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driver assistance systems WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation Based on the limits of the sys tem it cannot independently react to all traffic situations There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the re spective situations lt CAUTION The parking assistant can steer the vehi cle over or onto curbs There is risk of property damage Watch traffic closely and actively in terfere in the respective situations lt An engine that has been switched off by the Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati cally when the parking assistant is activated Overview Button in the vehicle Py Parking assistant 194 Ultrasound sensors LEO 4 D i With the four side ultrasound sensors arrows and the ultrasound sensors of the PDC in the bumpers the parking spaces are measured and the distances to obstacles determined To ensure full functionality gt Keep the sensors clean and free of ice re fer t
119. Roof mounted luggage rack Information Installation only possible in roof drip molding with flaps Further information is available from a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Roof racks are available as special accessories Securing Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack Roof drip rail with flaps N The anchorage points are located in the roof drip rail above the doors Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Loading Drivingtips tips Fold the cover outward Mounting Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof Magnetic roof mounted luggage rack Because of the aluminum roof magnetic roof mounted luggage racks cannot be used Loading Because roof racks raise the vehicle s center of gravity when loaded they have a major ef fect on vehicle handling and steering re sponse Therefore note the following when loading and driving gt Do not exceed the approved roof axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight gt Be sure that adequate clearance is main tained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof Distribute the roof load uniformly The roof load should not extend past the loading area gt Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom gt Secure the roof luggage firmly e g tie with ratchet straps gt Do not let objects project into the opening path o
120. SC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on if needed System limits A natural even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized Therefore check the tire inflation pressure regularly Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter nal circumstances cannot be recognized in ad vance The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations gt When the system has not been initialized gt When driving ona snowy or slippery road surface gt Sporty driving style spinning traction wheels high lateral acceleration drifting gt When driving with snow chains Actions in the event of a flat tire Normal tires 1 Identify the damaged tire Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility System refer to page 260 can be used for this purpose If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct the Flat Tire Monitor may not 269 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Wheels and tires have been initialized In this case initialize the system If identification of flat tire damage is not possible please contact a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop 2 Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System refer to page 260 Run flat tires Maximum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph 80 km h Continued dri
121. Status information iDrive 27 Status of Owner s Manual 7 Status vehicle 126 Steering and lane guidance assistant including Traffic Jam Assist 177 Steering Integral Active Steering 166 Steering wheel adjusting 87 Steering wheel heating 87 Steering wheel memory 87 Steptronic Sport transmis sion see Steptronic trans mission 106 Steptronic transmission 106 Stopping the engine see drive readiness 97 Storage compartment on the center console 226 Storage compartments 225 Storage compartments loca tions 225 Storage tires 260 Storing the vehicle 294 Suitable engine oil types 275 Summer tires tread 258 Sun visor 217 Supplementary text mes sage 117 Surround View 187 Suspension settings 110 Switch for Dynamic Driving Control 110 Switch see Cockpit 14 Symbols 6 Symbols in the status field 27 SYNC program automatic cli mate control 206 y Table 223 Tablet 36 Tachometer 118 Technical changes see Own Safety 7 Technical data 298 Telephone 6 Temperature automatic cli mate control 204 Temperature display for ex ternal temperature 118 Temperature engine oil 118 Tempomat see Active Cruise Control 168 Terminal starting aid 288 Text message supplemen tary 117 Theft alarm system see Alarm system 69 Thermal camera see Night Vision 147 Through loading system 222 Tilt alarm sensor 70 Time of arrival 124 Tire damage 258 Tire identification marks 256 Tire inflation p
122. The indi vidual settings are activated and stored for the profile currently used As soon as a setting is changed on the menu all settings of the menu are activated the button lights up orange Press button repeatedly It is switched between the following settings ALL ON All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions INDIVIDUAL the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in dividually switched off Press and hold this button All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off Press Status button Button lights up green all Intelli gent Safety systems are switched on Button lights up orange some In telligent Safety systems are switched off or settings for the sub functions were changed 5 Button does not light up all Intel ligent Safety systems are switched off Setting warning sensitivities About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Intelligent Safety Lane Departure Warning ee o S Select desired setting gt Always the system always alerts within the technical limitations gt Reduced some warning are sup pressed depending on the situation e g during passing without turn signal or when purposefully driving over lane markings in curves gt Off no warnings are issued 151 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI
123. This system assists the driver by automatically setting and releasing the brake such as when moving in stop and go traffic The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary On inclines the system prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when driving off General information Under the following conditions the parking brake is automatically engaged gt Drive readiness is deactivated gt The driver s door is opened while the vehi cle is stationary gt The moving vehicle is brought to a stand still using the parking brake park The indicator lamp changes from green to red The indicator lamp goes out AUTOH Information WARNING An unsecured vehicle can put itself into motion and roll away There is risk of an acci dent Before exiting secure the vehicle against rolling In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away observe the following gt Set the parking brake gt On uphill grades or on a slope turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb gt On uphill grades or on a slope also secure the vehicle e g with a wheel chock lt CAUTION If the vehicle is stationary Automatic Hold engages the parking brake It prevents the vehicle from rolling in a car wash There is risk of property damage Deactivate Automatic Hold prior to entering the car wash lt WARNING Unattended children or animals can move the vehicle and endanger thems
124. When DSC is deactivated driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving In Curves Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering system are only performed by the rear axle steering To increase vehicle stability activate DSC again as soon as possible 164 Deactivating DSC or Hold the button down until the DSC OFF indicator lamp is displayed in the instrument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed The DSC system is switched off The steering and depending on the equip ment Suspension are tuned for sporty driving Activating DSC A E Press button DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out Indicator warning lights When DSC is deactivated DSC OFF is dis played in the instrument cluster amp The indicator lamp lights up DSC is s deactivated DTC Dynamic Traction Control The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC where forward momentum is optimized The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions or loose road surfaces e g unplowed snowy roads but with some what limited driving stability Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves Therefore drive with appropriate caution You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances gt When driving in slush or on uncleared snow covered roads
125. a behind and next to the vehicle starting from a preset minimum speed The minimum speed is country specific and is displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety systems The system indicates whether there are vehi cles in the blind spot arrow 1 or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane arrow 2 The lamp in the exterior mirror is dimmed Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal the system issues a warning in the sit uations described above The lamp in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates Vehicles with side collision warning at speeds between 45 mph 70 km h and 130 mph 210 km h the system can intervene with a brief active steering intervention and help to return the vehicle into the lane Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess visi bility and traffic situation There is risk of an ac cident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations lt Overview Button in the vehicle Intelligent Safety Radar sensors A f The radar sensors are located in the rear bumper Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra dar sensors clean and unobstructed 153 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Safety Switching on off Switching on automatically The Active Blind Spot Detection is
126. ace for recharg ing external devices gt Due to the large number of audio devices available on the market it cannot be guar anteed that every USB device is operable on the vehicle gt Do not expose audio devices to extreme environmental conditions such as very high temperatures refer to the audio de vice operating instructions gt Due to the different configurations of audio and video files e g bit rates greater than 256 kbit s or the many different compres sion techniques proper playback cannot be guaranteed in all cases gt The connected audio device is supplied with a max power of 1 A if supported by the device Therefore do not additionally connect the device to a socket inside the vehicle otherwise playback may be com promised Not compatible USB devices 221 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Interior equipment gt USB hard drives USB hubs USB memory card readers with multiple in serts HFS formatted USB devices MTP devices Devices such as fans or lights In the center armrest 5 o The USB interface is located in the center arm rest In the center console The USB interface is located in the center con sole Through loading system General information The through loading system allows the trans port of long objects such as skies 222 Opening through loading without comfort seats 1 Fold down the center armres
127. acility BMW recom mends use of a facility that performs work e g maintenance and repair according to BMW specifications with properly trained personnel referred to in this Owner s Manual as another qualified service center or repair shop If work is performed improperly e g mainte nance and repair there is a risk of subsequent damage and related safety risks Parts and accessories BMW recommends the use of parts and ac cessory products approved by BMW Approved parts and accessories and advice on their use and installation are available from a BMW dealer s service center BMW parts and accessories were tested by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehicles Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 wt Information BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces sories BMW does not evaluate whether each individ ual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard even if a country specific official approval was issued BMW does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for BMW vehicles under all usage conditions California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo bile components and parts including compo nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi cle contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defec
128. ahead of you The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied For safety reasons it depends on the speed To maintain a certain distance the system au tomatically reduces the speed applies the brakes lightly or accelerates again if the vehi cle ahead begins moving faster If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt and then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe riod the system is able to detect this within the given system limits Your own vehicle will brake automatically and then accelerate again If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again after a prolonged period briefly press the ac celerator pedal or press the appropriate button to reactivate the system The vehicle will auto matically accelerate 168 As soon as the road is clear the vehicle accel erates to the desired speed Vehicles driving ahead are captured by a radar sensor and a camera General information Depending on the driving settings the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas The desired speed is also maintained downhill but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient Due to the driving style that minimizes fuel consumption in ECO PRO drive mode the ve hicle may drop below the set desired speed in some situations e g on uphill grades Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess th
129. ake sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag gt There should be no persons animals or objects between an airbag and a person gt Donotuse the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area gt Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear do not at tach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables e g for GPS devices or mobile phones gt Do not apply adhesive materials to the air bag cover panels do not cover them or modify them in any way gt Do not place slip covers seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags gt Donothang pieces of clothing such as jackets over the backrests gt Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system This also applies to steering wheel covers the dashboard and the seats gt Donotremove the airbag system Even when you follow all instructions very closely injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short term and in most cases temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors Functional readiness of the airbag system Information WARNING Individual components can be hot after trig
130. ance refer to page 172 With steering and lane guidance assistant adjusting distance Press button repeatedly until the de sired distance is set Continuing cruise control General information Press button with the system inter rupted The stored speed is reached and maintained In the following cases the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again gt When the system is switched off gt When drive readiness is switched off While standing The system brought the vehicle to a complete standstill gt Green marking in the speedometer Your vehicle accelerates automatically as soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra dar sensor moves off gt Speedometer markings turn orange white after a short time no automatic driving off By pressing the button the time in nae which there is automatic driving off is extended On Vehicle symbol in the distance indicator is moving away detected vehicle drove off The system was paused or your vehicle was brought to a halt actively through stepping on the brake pedal and it is standing behind an other vehicle RES 1 EA Press button to call up a stored desired speed 2 Release the brake pedal 3 When the vehicle in front drives off gt briefly press the gas pedal 171 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems gt Press button SET gt Press button gt Press
131. approach of the vehicle to an object is speaker shown on the Control Display Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Con trol Display before a signal sounds The shorter the distance to the object the shorter the intervals If the distance to a detected object is less than The display appears as soon as PDC is acti approx 10 in 25 cm a continuous tone is vated sounded The range of the sensors is represented in the If there are objects in front of and behind the colors green yellow and red vehicle at the same time with a distance smaller than approx 10 in 25 cm an alternat ing constant tone will sound Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation of the required space When the image of the rearview camera is dis played the switch can be made to PDC or toa different view with obstacle markings as needed The interval tone and constant tone are switched off if the selector lever position P is engaged The interval tone is switched off after a short ao i ry Rear view camera time when the vehicle is stationary Cross traffic warning refer to page 197 de pending on the equipment it is warned in the PDC display against vehicles approaching in the front or rear from the side Volume The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the entertainment volume can be adjusted About iDrive With parking assistant emergency 1 My Vehicle braking function Active PDC 2 System settings
132. area in the PDC view flashes red if vehicles are detected by the sen sors Display in the camera view gt Front_4 The respective boundary area arrow 1 in the camera view flashes red if vehicles are de tected by the sensors Information Provided by 4 OSALSR 199 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driving comfort Driving comfort Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Air suspension The concept Air suspension ensures best possible driving comfort under all load conditions Due to a var lable adjustment of the front and rear axles the damping is adjusted to the vehicle condition General information In the case of an uneven road surface the ve hicle level can be elevated to increase ground clearance gt Normal level for normal road surface gt Raised level when the road surface is poor In the SPORT driving mode refer to page 110 or at higher speeds the vehicle lowers itself Information WARNING With lowering the vehicle body parts can be jammed There is risk of i
133. art Stop function is activated Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop the vehicle can be switched off permanently e g when leaving it 1 Press the Start Stop button gt Drive readiness is switched off gt Operating readiness is switched on gt Selector lever position P is engaged automatically 2 Set the parking brake 99 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving Automatic deactivation In certain situations Auto Start Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons as if the driver were absent Malfunction The Auto Start Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically A Check Control message is displayed It is possible to continue driving Have the system checked Parking brake The concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi cle from rolling when it is parked Information WARNING An unsecured vehicle can put itself into motion and roll away There is risk of an acci dent Before exiting secure the vehicle against rolling In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away observe the following gt Set the parking brake gt On uphill grades or on a slope turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb gt On uphill grades or on a slope also secure the vehicle e g with a wheel chock WARNING Unattended children or animals can move
134. artridge is indicated carrier fluid is still left However it is not suffi cient for the perfuming A required fragrance cartridge replacement is automatically indicated on the Control Display Inserting fragrance cartridges The system can be accessed via the glove compartment 1 Open the glove compartment refer to page 225 2 Press onthe bottom of the cartridge holder arrow The cartridge holder slides down 7 A i 3 Remove cover of the fragrance cartridge to be inserted Touch the cover on its top to push it away from the fragrance cartridge arrow 1 Insert the cover on the back side of the fra grance cartridge arrow 2 4 Position fragrance cartridge such that the chip faces away from the cartridge holder arrow 1 Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres sure into the cartridge holder arrow 2 The cartridge engages easily noticeable 5 Push the cartridge holder up until it en gages 213 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Climate control Make sure that no objects press against the cartridge holder from below otherwise the function of the ambient air package could be impacted 6 Close the glove compartment Removing the fragrance cartridge The fragrance cartridges are accessed via the glove compartment 1 Open the glove compartment refer to page 225 2 Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder arrow The cartridge holder s
135. arts can be jammed when operat ing remote controlled systems e g the garage door using the universal garage door opener There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam age Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system Is clear during program ming and operation Also follow the safety in structions of the hand held transmitter lt The system such as the garage door can be operated using the button on the interior mirror while the drive or operating readiness is switched on To do this hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated The interior rearview mir ror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is be ing transmitted Deleting stored functions Press and hold the left and right button on the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes rap idly green All stored functions are deleted The functions cannot be deleted individually Sun visor Glare shield Fold the sun visor down or up Glare shield from the side Folding out 1 Fold the sun visor down 2 Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the side 3 Move it back to the desired position Folding up Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun visor Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be hind a cover When the cover is opened the mirror lighting switches on Ashtray Front Opening 1 Push the cover forward until
136. ase of sharp tire inflation pressure loss The yellow warning lamp lights up 266 A symbol with the affected tires will be dis played in the Check Control message gt There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in flation pressure gt No reset was performed for the system The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures before the last reset In these cases 1 Reduce your speed and stop cautiously Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run flat tires Run flat tires refer to page 260 are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire s sidewall WARNING A damaged regular tire with low or miss ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling such as steering and braking response Run flat tires can maintain limited stability There is risk of an accident Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run flat tires Observe the information on run flat tires and continued driving with these tires lt A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC Dynamic Stability Control Actions in the event of a flat tire Normal tires 1 Identify the damaged tire Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility System refer to page 260 can be used for this purpose If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
137. ased on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 g times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart signifi cantly from the norm due to variations in driv ing habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ma terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tire
138. ashing vehicle 292 Airbags 136 Airbags indicator warning light 137 302 Air circulation see Recircu lated air mode 205 Air dehumidifying see Cool ing function 204 Air distribution manual 205 Air flow automatic climate control 205 Air outlets see ventila tion 206 Air pressure tires 254 Air suspension 200 Alarm system 69 Alarm unintentional 70 All around the center con sole 16 All around the roofliner 18 All around the steering wheel 14 All season tires see Winter tires 259 All wheel drive see xDrive 165 Alternating code hand held transmitter 216 Alternative oil types 275 Ambient air package 211 Ambient light 133 134 Animal detection see Night Vision 147 Antifreeze washer fluid 106 Antilock Brake System ABS 163 Anti slip control see DSC 163 Approved axle load 299 Arrival time 124 Ashtray 217 Ashtray front 217 Ashtray rear 218 Assistance when driving off 163 Attentiveness assistant 161 AUC Automatic Recirculating Air Control 205 Audio 6 AUTO H button 100 AUTO H button see Auto matic Hold 100 AUTO intensity 204 Automatic car wash 291 Automatic climate con trol 203 Automatic Cruise Control with Stop amp Go 168 Automatic Curb Monitor 85 Automatic deactivation Front seat passenger air bags 138 Automatic headlight con trol 130 Automatic Hold 100 Automatic locking 68 Automatic Recirculating Air Control AUC 205 Automatic Soft Closing doors
139. assistant Steering and lane guidance as sistant including Traffic Jam As sist on off refer to page 177 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Radar sensor The radar sensor is located in the front bumper Always keep radar sensor clean and unob structed Camera view mirror Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear Switching on off and interrupting cruise control Switching on Press button on the steering wheel SEW The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the current speed Cruise control is active DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be switched on if needed 169 Controls Driver assistance systems Switch off To switch off the system while standing step on brake pedal at the same time Press button on the steering wheel lt a The displays go out The stored desired speed is deleted Interrupting When active press the button on the ee steering wheel If interrupting the system while stationary press on the brake pedal at the same time The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations gt When the brakes are applied gt When selector lever position D is disen gaged gt When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated When DSC is actively controlling stability gt Ifthe safety
140. at adjustment or improper installation of the child seat There is risk of injuries or danger to life Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest If possible ad just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged If possible adjust the height of the head re straints or remove them lt On the front passenger seat Deactivating airbags WARNING Active front seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated There is risk of inju ries Make sure that the front seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up After installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat make sure that the front knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated Deactivate the front seat passenger airbags automatically refer to page 138 Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint system move the front passenger seat as far back as possi ble and bring it up to medium height to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to 94 offer optimal protection in the event of an acci dent If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat move the passenger seat carefully forward un til the best possible belt guide pos
141. atic climate control buttons Press any button except gt Rear window defroster gt Left side of Air volume button gt Seat heating gt Seat ventilation 210 gt SYNC program Via the iDrive Parked car ventilation can be switched on or off via iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Climate functions A Comfort ventilation or Comfort heating ventilation 5 Activate now S symbol on the automatic climate control signals to switched on system Via BMW display key Parked car ventilation and parked car heating can be switched on or off via the BMW display key Switching on directly 1 Switch on the display of the BMW display key Climate control setting S amp Tap symbol Activate now Start ae eS e Switching off directly 1 Switch on the display of the BMW display key 2 Climate control setting 3 amp amp Tap symbol 4 Stop Departure time Different departure times can be adjusted to ensure a comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at the time of departure gt One time departure time the time can be set Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Climate control Controls The system is switched on once at the de sired time gt Departure time with weekday time and day of the week can be set The system is switched on repeatedly on the desired day of the week and time The departure time is pres set i
142. ation devices while driv ing can distract from traffic It is possible to lose control of the vehicle There is risk of an accident Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows If necessary stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary lt Control elements Overview 1 Control Display with touchscreen 2 Controller with buttons and touchpad Control Display Information gt To clean the Control Display follow the care instructions refer to page 294 gt Do not place objects close to the Control Display otherwise the Control Display can be damaged gt Inthe case of very high temperatures on the Control Display e g due to intense so lar radiation the brightness may be re duced down to complete deactivation Once the temperature is reduced e g through shadow or climate control system the normal functions are re established Switching on 1 Turn on operations 2 Press the controller Switch off 1 orron Press button 21 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GEIG iDrive 2 Turn off control display mM Options F Split screen Turn off control display Change driver profile Buttons on controller ntroller i ooo Press button Function General information Press once call up main menu The buttons can be used to open the menus directly The controller can be used to select MENU Press twice open rec
143. ay change control display settings via touchpad Slide left or right accordingly Split screen General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen e g information from the on board comupter In the divided screen view the so called split screen this information remains visible even when you change to another menu Switching the split screen on and off 1 Press button 2 Split screen Selecting the display 1 Press button 2 Move the controller to the right until the split screen is selected 3 Press the controller Media Fadi PO R 29 BAYERNS 9 40 4 Select desired setting Specifying the number of displays It is possible to specify the number of displays 1 Move the controller to the right until the split screen is selected Press the controller Personalize menu Select desired setting 2 i a Move the controller to the left Status information Status field The following information is displayed in the status field gt Messages gt Wireless network reception strength gt Current entertainment source gt Time Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows Radio symbols Symbol Meaning HJ HD Radio station is being received 27 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GECUL iDrive Telephone symbols Symbol Meaning sy S alll A alll Oe bP KRU Incoming
144. azard warning system gt Set the parking brake and engage lever in position P P Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 gt Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out side the immediate area in a safe place such as behind a guardrail gt If necessary set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning lamp at an appro priate distance gt Perform wheel change only on a flat solid and slip resistant surface On soft or slip pery ground e g snow ice tiles etc the vehicle or vehicle jack can slip away to the side gt Do not place wood blocks or similar items under the vehicle jack otherwise it cannot reach its carrying capacity because of the restricted height gt Ifthe vehicle is raised do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine other wise a fatal hazard exists Information WARNING The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only There is risk of injuries Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack Removing the emergency wheel The emergency wheel and the tools are lo cated in the trunk under the cargo floor panel Replacing components Remove the cargo floor panel To do this pull the floor upward directly behind the rear backrests Loosen the lashing straps Remove tool holder Remove emergency wheel Prepare wheel change 1
145. be safely attached to the floor Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats Make sure that there is sufficient clear ance for the pedals Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re moved e g for cleaning lt Floor mats can be removed from the car s inte rior for cleaning If the floor carpets are very dirty clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner To prevent matting of the carpet rub back and forth in the direction of travel only Sensor camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent 294 Displays screens protective glass of the Head up Display CAUTION Chemical cleansers moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of displays and screens There is risk of property damage Clean with a clean antistatic microfiber cloth lt CAUTION The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning There is risk of prop erty damage Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials Clean with a clean antistatic microfiber cloth Clean the protective glass of the Head up Dis play refer to page 126 using a microfiber cloth and commercially available dish washing soap Long term When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months special measures must be taken Further information is available from a dealer s service center o
146. board comupter information Music collection Navigation e g stored destinations Phone book Online data e g Favorites cookies Office data e g voice notes VV VV VV VY VV Login accounts Altogether the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary Deleting data Heed and follow the instructions on the Con trol Display About iDrive Turn on operations My Vehicle System settings Delete personal data Delete personal data OK Exit and lock the vehicle aoe SS YS After 15 minutes the deletion process is com pleted If not all of the data was deleted repeat the de letion Canceling deletion Switch on the drive ready function to cancel deletion of the data Connections The concept Devices such as mobile phones or laptops can be connected to the vehicle in different ways and used gt Connect mobile phone with the vehicle via Bluetooth and use it gt Listen to music of an audio player via Blue tooth gt Play back smartphone videos on the Con trol Display gt Use smartphone apps in the vehicle Connect a device using the vehicle integrated WLAN hotspot to use the Inter net gt Use vehicle functions via Touch Com mand refer to page 36 General information All devices paired and or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list About iDrive 1 My Vehicle
147. brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal The vehicle symbol and dis tance bars flash red and an acoustic signal sounds You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver Displays in the Head up Display With Active Cruise control some system infor mation can also be displayed in the Head up Display p The symbol is displayed on the Head up Display if the set desired speed is reached Distance information The symbol is displayed when the dis F tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is too short The distance information is active under the following circumstances gt Active Cruise Control switched off gt Display in the Head up Display selected refer to page 126 gt Distance too short gt Speed greater than approx 40 mph 70 km h System limits Speed range The system is best used on well constructed roads The minimum speed that can be set is 20 mph 30 km h The maximum speed that can be set is 115 mph 180 km h The system can also be activated when sta tionary Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit uation when using the system Detection range The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited Two wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected Deceleration The system also does not decelerate in the fol lowing situations gt For pe
148. bstacle mark ings match the markings of the PDC Setting brightness and contrast via iDrive With the rearview camera switched on 1 Move the controller to the left 2 gt Brightness gt Contrast 3 Set the desired value System limits Deactivated camera If the camera is deactivated e g if the tailgate is open the camera image is displayed hatched in gray Information Provided by eo A 186 MSEE Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Controls Detection of objects Very low obstacles as well as high protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system Assistance functions also take into account data of the PDC Follow instructions in the PDC chapter refer to page 180 The objects displayed on the Control Display under certain circumstances are closer than they appear Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display Malfunction A camera malfunction is displayed on the Con trol Display A red symbol is displayed and the re cording range of the malfunctioning camera is displayed in black on the Control Display Surround View The concept The system provides assistance in parking and maneuvering The area around the vehicle is shown on the Control Display Several cameras display the area from different selectable perspectives In addition assistance functions e g guidelines can be faded into
149. by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Wheels and tires Mobility Wheel and tire combination You can ask the dealer s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop about the right wheel tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC To maintain good handling and vehicle re sponse use only tires with a single tread con figuration from a single manufacturer Following tire damage have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible WARNING Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi cle e g due to contact with the body due to tolerances despite the same official size rating There is risk of an accident lt WARNING Mounted steel wheels can cause techni cal problems e g independent loosening of the lug bolts damage to the brake discs There is risk of an accident Do not mount steel wheels lt Recommended tire brands For each tire size the manufacturer of your ve hicle recommends certain tire brands These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall New tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur ing circumstances when tires are brand new they achieve their full tracti
150. by the sensors In this case sys tem cannot be used When driving within narrow lanes the system cannot be activated or meaningfully used Do not use the system e g gt In construction zones 180 gt In rescue lanes gt Within city limits Weather In the event of unfavorable weather and light conditions e g if there is rain snowfall slush fog or glare this may result in poorer recogni tion of vehicles as well as short term interrup tions for vehicles that are already detected Drive attentively and react to the current traffic situation If necessary intervene actively e g by braking steering or evading PDC Park Distance Control The concept PDC is a support when parking Objects that you are approaching slowly in front of or be hind the vehicle are indicated with gt Signal tones gt Visual display With parking assistant obstacles on the side of the vehicle that are detected by the sensors of the parking assistant can also be reported by the PDC Side protection refer to page 183 General information Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers and possi bly sideways on the vehicle measure the dis tances from objects The maneuvering range depending on the ob stacle and environmental conditions is approx 6 ft 2 m An acoustic warning is first given with the fol lowing circumstances gt By the front center sensors at ap prox 74 in 70 cm gt By the rear middle sensors at
151. by the voice activation system is announced and dis played in the instrument cluster ry This symbol in the instrument cluster D indicates that the voice activation sys tem is active If no other commands are available use func tion via iDrive Terminating the voice activation system i Briefly press the button on the steer ing wheel or gt Cancek Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands Commends from other menus can also be spoken You may select lists such as phone lists via voice activation Read these lists out loud ex actly as they show in the respective list Displaying possible commands Displayed in the top area of the Control Display are gt Possible commands for the current menu gt Possible commands from other menus 33 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GECUL Voice activation system gt Status of the voice recognition gt Status of the encrypted connection Help on the voice activation system gt To have the available spoken instructions read out loud Voice commands gt Have information about the principle of op eration for the voice activation system be announced gt General information on voice controk gt Announce help for the current menu gt Help One example open the tone settings The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller 1 Tu
152. can be adjusted by hand Folding up Press the mirror up Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Adjusting Controls Steering wheel Information WARNING Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel move ments Vehicle control could be lost There is risk of an accident Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only Power steering wheel adjustment Adjusting Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating position Storing the position Seat mirror and steering wheel memory refer to page 87 Heated steering wheel Overview _ Heated steering wheel Switching on off amp Press button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out If the trip is resumed within approx 15 min steering wheel heating is automatically acti vated again Seat mirror and steering wheel memory The concept Two different driver s seat exterior mirror and steering wheel positions can be stored per profile refer to page 58 and called up Information WARNING Using the memory function while driving can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel movements Vehicle control could be lost There is risk of an accident Only retrieve the memory function when the vehicle is station ary lt WARNING There is risk of jamming when moving the seats There is risk of injuries or risk of prop
153. ce activation system Display Jumpin jack flash Out of time The Rolling Stones v 2000 light years from home Depending on your vehicle s optional features the list in the instrument cluster can differ from the illustration shown 121 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Displays Activating a list and adjusting the Information at a glance setting Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information in the instrument cluster gt Miles and trip miles gt Bar display for energy recovery and current fuel consumption gt Bar display for range Average fuel consumption and average speed On the right side of the steering wheel turn gt Time of arrival and distance to destination the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding When destination guidance is activated in list the navigation system Using the thumbwheel select the desired set gt In ECO PRO mode bonus range ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel Digital speed Adjusting displays for on board On board computer in the computer instrument cluster For several displays of the on board computer it is possible to set whether they can be called Display up in the instrument cluster The information from the on board computer About iDrive is shown in the instrument cluster My Vehicle System settings Calling up information Displays
154. ception range gt Updated Remote control is outside of the reception range It indicates when the Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Opening and closing Controls last data transfer from the vehicle took place Controls If the information area contains more than one page then page indicators are shown beneath the information O O The indicator for the current page has been filled in Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change between the pages If additional information is available on a page tap the appropriate symbol J Touch the arrow symbol beneath the dis play to return to the original page Switching the display on off The display will go out automatically after a brief period to conserve battery power To hide the display manually press the button on the left side of the remote control Over view refer to page 56 Show the display 1 Press button on the left side of the remote control 2 Then swipe with your finger from bottom to top to unlock the screen lock Completely switch off the display to increase the usable battery life 1 Press and hold the button on the left side of the remote control for longer than 4 sec onds 2 OK tap Press button on the left side of the remote control to switch on the switched off display Operating concept Depending on the equipment there are up to five main menus that provide access to the Sub menus The follo
155. cle if it can be established gt Ifthe LED is flashing green but the BMW Response Center can no longer be heard via the speaker you can nevertheless still be heard at the BMW Response Center Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions an Emergency Re quest is automatically initiated immediately af ter a severe accident Automatic Collision Noti fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button Warning triangle The warning triangle is located on the inside of the trunk lid Press on the release arrow 1 and swivel the cover down arrow 2 Breakdown assistance First aid kit Information Some of the articles have a limited service life Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly J A YN Storage EN The first aid kit is located in the left storage compartment of the cargo area Jump starting General information If the battery is discharged the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables Only use jumper ca bles with fully insulated clamp handles Information DANGER Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock There is risk of injuries or danger to life Do not touch any components that are under voltage lt To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles adhere strictly to the following proce dure 287 Online Edition for Part
156. cle electrical system drawing exces Sive current Functional requirements In ECO PRO mode this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph ap prox 50 km h to 100 mph approx 160 km h if the following conditions are met gt Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated gt The selector lever is in selector lever posi tion D 245 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving tips _ ecm Saving fuel gt Engine and transmission are at operating temperature The driving status Coast can be influenced with the shift paddles Activate coasting via the shift paddles 1 Using the shift paddles shift to the high est gear 2 Shift paddles press again to enter coast ing mode Deactivate coasting Press shift paddles Display Display in the instrument cluster The mark in the efficiency dis play below the tachometer is backlit in blue and is located at the zero point The tachometer approximately indicates idle speed The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the zero point during coasting Display in the instrument cluster with expanded scope The mark in the efficiency dis play is backlit in blue and is lo cated at the zero point The coasting point indicator is il luminated at the zero point dur ing coasting Indications on the Control Display The Coasting driving condition is displayed in EfficientDynamics Info while th
157. cle oper ation All gears for forward travel are activated automatically To reduce fuel consumption the engine is au tomatically decoupled from the transmission under the conditions described for Coasting refer to page 245 R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary N Neutral The vehicle may roll in selector lever posi tion N Engage selector lever position N e g in car washes refer to page 291 With operating readiness switched off refer to page 20 selector lever position P is engaged automatically P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary The drive wheels are blocked Selector lever position P is engaged automati Cally gt After drive readiness refer to page 97 is switched off and selector lever position R or D is engaged gt If operating readiness is switched off and selector lever position N is engaged gt Ifthe driver s safety belt is released the driver s door is opened and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and selector lever position D or R is set Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position Engaging selector lever positions General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start It is not possible to shift out of sel
158. cle settings Intelligent Safety Blind Spot Detection Select desired setting Off With this setting no warning is out put The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used ae YY Set force of the steering wheel vibration About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Steering wheel vibration 4 Select desired setting The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety systems and stored for the profile currently used Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Controls Vehicles with side collision warning switching steering intervention on off The steering intervention can be switched on and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec tion and lane departure warning About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Intelligent Safety 4 Steering intervention The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Issued warning Lamp in the exterior mirror Y Information stage The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror indi cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind WARNING If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the exterior mirror flashes brightly Vehicles with side collision warning it at speeds between 45 mph 70 km h and 130 mph 210 km h the vibrating steering wheel is ignored and the lane marking crossed
159. cup holders Rear center console Without rear console Connecting electrical devices Information CAUTION Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents which means that the 12V on board network can be overloaded or damaged There is risk of property damage Only connect battery charg Open the cover The cigarette lighter is onthe ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid right side terminals in the engine compartment To close the cover tap it again CAUTION If metal objects fall into the socket they can cause a short circuit There is risk of prop erty damage Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket lt x SSS 219 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Interior equipment Sockets General information The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment when operation and the drive ready state are switched on Information The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts Do not damage the socket by using non com patible connectors Front center console 1 Push the cover forward until it engages be hind the cup holders FAW N 2 Remove the cover or cigarette lighter Open the cover Remove the cover or cigarette lighter To close the cover tap it again If equipped with rear console va v vg The socket is located between
160. curacy of this function over the long term Calibrating the front seats WARNING There is risk of jamming when moving the seats There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad justment lt A corresponding message appears on the Control Display 1 Press the switch and move the respective seat all the way forward 2 Press the switch forward again The seat still moves forward slightly 3 Readjust the seat to the desired position The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disap pears If the message continues to be displayed re peat the calibration If the message does not disappear after a re peat calibration have the system checked as soon as possible Intelligent Safety The concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance system Depending on how the vehicle is equipped Intelligent Safety consists of one or more systems that can help prevent a imminent collision gt Front end collision warning with braking function refer to page 140 gt Pedestrian warning with City Braking func tion refer to page 144 gt Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detection refer to page 147 gt Lane departure warning refer to page 150 gt Active Blind Spot Detection refer to page 153 gt Side collision warning refer to page 156 Information
161. d the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up 2 Engage selector lever position S 3 With the left foot forcefully press down on the brake 4 Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position kickdown A flag symbol is displayed in the instru ment cluster 5 The starting engine speed adjusts Within 3 seconds release the brake Before using Launch Control allow the trans mission to cool down for approx 5 minutes Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions e g wet pavement when used again 110 Driving Dynamics Control The concept The Driving Dynamics Control influences the driving dynamics properties of the vehicle The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the sit uation using various driving modes The following systems are affected Engine characteristics Steptronic transmission Dynamic Damping Control Air suspension Active roll stabilization Integral Active Steering Display in the instrument cluster Cruise control V YoY yy yy Y yy Backrest width for comfort seats Overview H a Controls Drive modes Press but Drive mode Configuration ton SPORT INDIVIDUAL COMFORT PLUS ECOPRO INDIVIDUAL ADAPTIVE Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving Controls Selecting a driving mode Press button for the desired driving mode once Activating configuration of the driving mode Pre
162. d the left and right buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for ap proximately 10 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly green This erases all pro 215 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Interior equipment Read the system s operating manual or press the programmed button on the interior rear view mirror longer If the LED on the interior rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds the system features an alternating code system Flashing and continuous illumination of the LED will re peat for approximately 20 seconds gramming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror 3 Press the interior mirror button to be pro grammed The LED flashes orange 4 Hold the hand held transmitter for the sys tem to be controlled approx 1 to 3 in 2 5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior mirror The required distance depends on the manual transmitter 5 Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand held transmitter The LED on the interior mirror will begin flash ing slowly orange 6 Assoonas the LED flashes green more rapidly or lights up continuously release the button Green light indicates that the button on the interior mirror was program med Faster green flashing indicates that it is a change code wireless system If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds change the distance be tween the interior rea
163. d up There is risk of property damage Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing Press and hold button on the remote control for approx one second The trunk lid opens regardless of whether the vehicle was previously locked or unlocked To avoid locking it into the vehicle do not place the remote control in the cargo area Depending on the features and the country version it is also possible to have door un locked Create the settings refer to page 67 If the doors were not unlocked the trunk lid is locked again as soon as it closes Switching on the headlight courtesy delay feature xD Press button on the remote control The duration can be set in the Control Display 61 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Opening and closing Malfunction Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol lowing circumstances gt The battery of the remote control is dis charged Replace the battery refer to page 55 gt Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power gt Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects gt Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices In the case of
164. d when the Buttons in the vehicle external temperatures are low The camera lens is automatically cleaned to gether with the headlights Switching on off parm j Switching on automatically When it is dark outside the system is automat ically active after every driving off Switching on heat image additionally Py intelligent Safety T C The heat image from the Night Vision camera can also be displayed on the Control Display This function has no effect on object detec tion Press button VA The image from the camera is displayed on the Control Display Set heat image via iDrive With heat image switched on Switch on switch off heat image 7 Ad 1 Select brightness or contrast gt Brightness gt Contrast 2 Set the desired value 148 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Display Warning of people or animals in danger If a collision with a person or an animal de tected in this way is imminent a warning sym bol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head up Display Although both the shape and the heat radiation are analyzed false warnings cannot be ruled out Warning area in front of the vehicle The warning area for the pedestrian warning consists of two parts gt Central area arrow 1 directly in front of the vehicle gt Expanded area arrow 2 to the right and left With animal warnings no distinction is made betwe
165. destrians or similar slow moving road users gt For red traffic lights For cross traffic For oncoming traffic 173 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driver assistance systems Swerving vehicles Cornering A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis tance This also applies to major speed differ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you e g when rapidly approaching a truck When a ve hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu vers if needed WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation Based on the limits of the sys tem it cannot independently react to all traffic situations There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the re spective situations lt 174 If the desired speed is too high for a curve the speed is reduced slightly although curves can not be anticipated in advance Therefore drive into a curve at an appropriate speed In tight curves the system offers only restricted detection where a vehicle ahead of you mig
166. displayed in the instrument cluster Speed limit detection Current speed limit r Speed limit detection is not available Speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head up Display System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol lowing situations gt In heavy fog rain or snowfall gt When signs are concealed by objects gt When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you When driving toward bright lights gt When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over dirty or cov ered by a sticker etc gt Inthe event of incorrect detection by the camera gt If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect gt In areas not covered by the navigation sys tem gt When roads differ from the navigation such as due to changes in road routing gt When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker gt If the traffic signs are non conforming Displays gt During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle delivery Selection lists in the instrument cluster The concept Depending on your vehicle s equipment the following can be displayed or operated using the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer ing wheel as well as the displays in the instru ment cluster and the Head up Display gt Current audio source gt Redial phone feature gt Turn on voi
167. e lt 1 Pull and hold the door handle outward with one hand Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Opening and closing Controls 2 Guide one finger of the other hand from the back under the lid push the palpable re lease outward and remove the lid From the inside Unlocking and locking 3 Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key refer to page 54 The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside Alarm system The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened when the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock In order to terminate this alarm unlock vehicle with the remote control if needed through emergency detection of the remote control re fer to page 55 Via the buttons for the central locking system gt Pressing the button unlocks the vehicle gt Pressing the button locks the ve af hicle if the front doors are closed The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking The fuel filler flap remains unlocked In the event of a severe accident the vehicle is automatically unlocked The hazard warning system and interior lights come on Unlocking and opening gt Press the central locking system button to unlock the doors to gether and then pull the door handle above the armrest Doors Automatic Soft Closing To clos
168. e activation system Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system Action steps Action steps to be carried out are presented as numbered list The steps must be carried out in the defined order 1 First action step 2 Second action step Enumerations Enumerations without mandatory order or al ternative possibilities are presented as list with bullet points gt First possibility gt Second possibility Symbols on vehicle components Ti Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner s Manual for information on a particular part or assembly Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Information ss Vehicle features and options This Owner s Manual describes all models and all standard country specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series Therefore in this Owner s Manual we also de scribe and illustrate features that are not avail able in your vehicle e g because of the se lected optional features or the country specific version This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems For any options and equipment not described in this Owner s Handbook refer to the Supple mentary Owner s Handbooks On right hand drive vehicles some controls are arranged differently from what is shown in the illust
169. e traffic situation Based on the limits of the sys tem it cannot independently react to all traffic situations There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the re spective situations lt WARNING An unsecured vehicle can put itself into motion and roll away There is risk of an acci dent Before exiting secure the vehicle against rolling In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away observe the following gt Set the parking brake gt On uphill grades or on a slope turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb gt On uphill grades or on a slope also secure the vehicle e g with a wheel chock Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Overview Buttons on the steering wheel Cruise control on off refer to page 169 Store maintain speed refer to SET page 170 RES Pause cruise control refer to CNCL page 170 Continue cruise control with the last setting refer to page 171 Without steering and lane guid ance assistant Increase distance refer to page 171 Without steering and lane guid ance assistant Reduce distance refer to page 171 With steering and lane guidance assistant Adjust distance refer to page 171 Rocker switch Maintain store change speed refer to page 170 With steering and lane guidance
170. e turn signal is set before leaving the lane Vehicles with side collision warning if the vi brating steering wheel is ignored and the lane marking crossed the system intervenes with a brief active steering intervention and helps to maintain the vehicle in the lane Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess route and traffic situation There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations In the event of a warning do not unnecessarily jerk the steering wheel lt Overview Button in the vehicle Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Controls Intelligent Safety f f lt a W The camera is installed near the interior rear view mirror Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear Switching on off Switching on automatically The lane departure warning is automatically activated after departure if the function was switched on the last time the engine was stop ped Switching on off manually Press button The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off all systems are now switched on Configure INDIVIDUAL depending on the equipment version the Intelligent Safety sys tems can be individually configured
171. e 41 Connections 41 Continued driving with a flat tire 267 270 Control Display 21 Control Display settings 38 Controller 22 Control systems driving sta bility 163 Convenient opening with the remote control 61 Coolant 277 Coolant level 277 Coolant temperature 118 Cooler 223 Cooling function 204 Cooling maximum 204 Cooling system 277 Corrosion on brake discs 236 Cosmetic mirror 217 Courtesy lamps with the vehi cle locked 61 Cross traffic warning 197 Cruise control 175 Cruise control active with Stop amp Go 168 Cruising range 123 Cupholder 228 Current fuel consump tion 123 D Damage tires 258 Damping control dy namic 201 Data technical 298 Daytime running lights 131 Defrosting see Windows de frosting 206 Dehumidifying air 204 Deleting personal data 40 Deletion of personal data 40 Departure time parked car heating 211 Departure time parked car ventilation 211 Destination distance 124 Device list 41 Digital clock 118 Dimensions 298 Dimmable exterior mirrors 86 Dimmable interior rearview mirror 86 Direction indicator see Turn signals 103 Display in windshield 126 Display lighting see Instru ment lighting 133 Displays 113 Displays cleaning 294 Disposal coolant 278 Disposal vehicle battery 285 Distance control see PDC 180 Distance to destination 124 Divided screen view split screen 27 Door handle lighting see wel come lights 130 Door l
172. e Monitor FTM 268 311 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Wheels Tire Pressure Moni tor TPM 264 WiFi 45 WiFi connection 45 Window defroster rear 206 Windows powered 70 Windshield washer fluid 106 Windshield washer noz zles 105 Windshield washer sys tem 103 Windshield washer system see washer wiper sys tem 103 Windshield wiper see wiper system 103 Winter storage care 294 Winter tires suitable tires 259 Winter tires tread 258 Wiper 103 Wiper blades replacing 281 Wiper fluid 106 Wiper fold out position 105 Wiper system 103 WLAN connection 44 Wood care 293 Word match concept naviga tion 24 Wrench see Onboard vehicle tool kit 281 X xDrive 165 312 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Information Provided by D E ANL SR More about BMW The Ultimate bmwusa com Driving Machine Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 0140 2 964 330 ue
173. e camera or the front windshield are dirty or covered gt Upto 10 seconds after the start of the en gine via the Start Stop button V During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle delivery Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Controls gt If there are constant blinding effects be cause of oncoming light e g from the sun low in the sky gt When it is dark outside Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detection The concept Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec tion is a night vision system An infrared camera scans the area in front of the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedestrians and animals on the street Warm objects that are similar in shape to human be ings or animals are detected by the system If necessary the heat image can be displayed on the Control Display Heat image The image shows the heat radiated by objects in the field of view of the camera Warm objects have a light appearance and cold objects a dark appearance The ability to detect an object depends on the temperature difference between the object and the background and on the level of heat radiation emitted by the object Objects that are similar in temperature to the environment or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de tect For safety reasons when driving at speeds above approx 3 mph 5 km h and in low ambi ent light the image is only dis
174. e high beams are activated whenever the traffic situation allows In the low speed range the high beams are not switched on by the system General information The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you and to adequate illumination e g in towns and cities The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual Depending on the version of the system in the vehicle the high beams may not switch off for oncoming vehicles but may only be dimmed in the areas that blind oncoming traffic In this case the blue indicator light will stay on Activating WL 1 Turn the light switch to position 20 2 Press and hold PC button on blinker lever s0 When the low beams are on the lights are au tomatically brightened or dimmed The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up 132 The blue indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams Deactivating The High beam Assistant can be switched off when manually switching the high beams on and off refer to page 103 To reactivate the High beam Assistant press the button on the turn signal lever System limits The High beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver s personal judgment of when to use the high beams Therefore man ually switch off the high beams in situations where required to avoid a safety risk The syst
175. e is displayed Requirements A current measured value is available after ap prox 30 minutes of driving During a shorter trip the status of the last sufficiently long trip is displayed With frequent short distance trips regularly perform a detailed measurement Displaying the engine oil level About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle status Engine oil level ee i ae Q 7 Measure engine oil level The engine oil level is displayed Engine oil level display messages Different messages appear on the Control Dis play depending on the engine oil level Pay at tention to these messages If the engine oil level is too low within the next 125 miles 200 km add engine oil refer to page 274 CAUTION A too low engine oil level causes engine damage There is risk of property damage Im mediately add engine oil lt 273 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Engine oil Take care not to add too much engine oil CAUTION Too much engine oil can damage the en gine or the catalytic converter There is risk of property damage Do not add too much engine oil Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Detailed measurement The concept In the detailed measurement the engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale Gasoline engine If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level a check con
176. e left and right of the vehicle can only be detected Information Provided by 6 d OHSALSR 191 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driver assistance systems relatively late from the driver s seat The cam eras in the front and rear capture the sideways traffic area to improve the view Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front and rear end of the vehicle The camera image shows different levels of distortion in some areas and is thus not suita ble for distance estimations Display on the Control Display Press the button when the engine is run ning Depending on the driving direction the image of the respective camera is displayed gt front front camera image gt rear rear camera image The cross traffic warning refer to page 197 can additionally warn against oncoming vehi cles using radar sensors With navigation system activation points The concept Positions at which Panorama View is to switch on automatically can be stored as activation points as soon as a GPS signal is received Up to ten activation points can be stored Activation points can be used when driving for ward for the front camera Storing activation points 1 Drive to the position at which the system is to be switched on and stop 2 Press button 3 Move the controller to the left 4 ec Add activation point The current position is displayed 5 Add activation point
177. e light emitting diodes which are related to conventional lasers are officially designated as Class 1 light emitting diodes WARNING Too intensive brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye There is risk of injuries Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources for an extended period of time Do not remove the LED covers lt Headlight glass Condensation can form on the inside of the ex ternal lights in cool or humid weather When driving with the lights switched on the con 282 densation evaporates after a short time The headlight glass does not need to be changed If despite driving with the lights switched on increasing humidity forms e g water droplets in the lamp the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends having it checked by a dealer s service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop Changing wheels Information When using run flat tires or sealants a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Jacking points for the vehicle jack The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated at the positions shown Emergency wheel Safety measures gt Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground Switch on the h
178. e load los kg 2 900 1 315 Approved rear axle load los kg 3 140 1 424 Approved roof load capacity los kg 220 100 Cargo area capacity cu ft 18 2 Canada trunk capacity cu ft l 18 2 515 fy SSK ER sae Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Reference _ Technical data Capacities Fuel tank approx 20 6 78 Fuel quality refer to page 252 ee Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Appendix Reference Appendix Any updates to the Owner s Manual of the ve hicle are listed here 301 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Reference Everything from A to Z Everything from A to Z Index A ABS Antilock Brake Sys tem 163 ACC Active Cruise Control with Stop amp Go 168 Acceleration Assistant see Launch Control 106 Accessories and parts 7 Accident prevention see Ac tive Protection 160 Activated charcoal filter 206 Activating gesture control 30 Active Blind Spot Detec tion 153 Active comfort chassis 201 Active Cruise Control with Stop amp Go ACC 168 Active damping adjust ment 201 Active Protection 160 Active roll stabilization 202 Active seat ventilation 92 Active Steering integral 166 Adaptive brake assistant 163 Adaptive brake lights see Brake force display 160 ADAPTIVE drive mode see Driving Dynamics Con trol 110 Adaptive Light Control 131 ADAPTIVE see Driving Dy namics Control 110 Additives oil 275 Adjustments seats head re straints 76 After w
179. e tank lid in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap Closing 1 Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click 2 Close the fuel filler flap WARNING The retaining strap of the fuel cap be jammed and crushed during closing In this case the lid cannot be correctly closed and fuel vapors or fuel can escape There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage Pay atten tion that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the lid lt Manually unlocking fuel filler flap E g in the event of an electrical malfunction Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Refueling Mobility The release is located in the trunk 1 Remove the cover on the right side trim gt 2 Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol This releases the fuel filler flap i Observe the following when refueling CAUTION Fuels are toxic and aggressive Overfill ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys tem On contact with painted surfaces dam age may occur to these surfaces The environment is polluted There is risk of prop erty damage Avoid overfilling lt The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time Observe safety regulations posted at the gas station 251 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Fuel Fuel Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and o
180. e the doors push lightly It is closed automatically WARNING Body parts can be jammed on operating the doors There is risk of injuries Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during opening and closing lt 63 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Opening and closing Trunk lid Information To avoid locking it into the vehicle do not place the remote control in the cargo area Opening During opening the trunk lid pivots back and up Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening gt Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid Press and hold button on the re mote control for approx one sec ond As the case may be the doors are also un locked Opening with the remote control refer to page 61 gt Press button in the storage com partment of the driver s door The opening procedure is interrupted gt By pressing the button again gt When starting the engine gt When the vehicle starts moving gt By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate Closing Without Comfort Access 64 es gt Press button on the inside of the trunk lid The trunk lid closes automatically With Comfort Access gt Press button arrow 1 on the inside of the trunk lid gt Press button arrow 2 The vehicle will be locked after closing the tailgate The driver s door must be closed for this purpose and the remote con
181. eady state is deactivated while the vehicle is coast ing to a halt Automatic Hold is deactivated Automatic Hold remains active during the en gine stop brought about by the Auto Start Stop function Switching function readiness off Press button The LED on the button goes out The indicator lamp goes out AUTO H Automatic Hold is switched off AUTO H If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold press on the brake pedal to switch it off Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake secure the vehicle against roll ing using a wheel chock e g when leaving it After a power failure Putting the parking brake into operation 1 Turn on operations 2 Pull the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set and then push It may take several seconds for the brake to be put into operation Any sounds associated with this are normal park he indicator lamp in the instrument P cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving Controls Turn signal high beams headlight flasher Turn signal Turn signal in exterior mirror When driving and during operation of the turn signals or hazard warning system do not fold in the exterior mirrors so that the signal lights on the exterior mirror are easy to see Using turn signals Press the lever bey
182. ected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Climate control Controls Automatic recirculated air control AUC The concept The automatic recirculated air control AUC au tomatically recognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air The outside air supply is then automatically shut off the interior air is recircu lated General information If the system is activated a sensor detects pol lutants in the outside air and controls the shut off automatically If the system is deactivated outside air contin uously flows into the car s interior With constant recirculated air mode the air quality in the car s interior deteriorates and the fogging of the windows increases If there is window condensation switch off the recirculated air mode and press the button on the driver s side to uti lize the condensation sensor Make sure that air can flow to the windshield AUTO Switching on off About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings 1 2 3 Climate functions 4 Air quality 5 Automatic air recirculation Recirculated air mode The concept You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle Operating via button Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode
183. ector lever position P until the engine is running and the brake is applied With the vehicle is stationary press on the brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever position P or N otherwise the shift command will not be executed shift lock A block prevents the inadvertent switching to selector lever position R or the inadvertent change from selector lever position P Engaging selector lever position D N 0 gt gt 2 r va Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di rection beyond a resistance point if needed After releasing the selector lever it returns to its center position 107 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving Canceling the lock p Pa A 74 Press unlock button Engage selector lever position P N Z Press button P Sport program and manual mode Activating the sport program S VW Press the selector lever to the left out of selec tor lever position D The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster e g S1 The sport program of the transmission is acti vated 108 Activating the M S manual mode 1 Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D 2 Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster e g M1 If the situation requires the Steptronic trans mission
184. ects to the hotspot via WLAN With the first Internet usage via the WLAN hot spot data volume must be purchased from a service provider All devices connected via the WLAN hotspot use this data volume If necessary data volume can be purchased from the ConnectedDrive Store WiFi connection Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear Control Display About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Mobile devices Connect new device Er Miracast The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed on the Control Display aS SY YS 6 Search for WiFi devices in the surround ings of the device The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on the device display Select the WiFi name of the vehicle 7 Compare the control number on the Con trol Display with the control number on the display of the device Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display 8 The device is connected and displayed in the device list If pairing was unsuccessful What to do if re fer to page 47 Additional functions After initial pairing gt The device is connected with the vehicle within a short period of time if the engine is running or the operating readiness Is switched on gt The data stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle after recognition gt Forsome devices certain settings may be necessary e g authorization see owner s manual of the device gt Af
185. eed and its fuel consumption can be reduced by back ing off the accelerator and coasting until the route section is reached 244 Depending on the situation the system also uses the engine brake automatically with a pausing of the coast refer to page 245 func tion Functional requirements This function is available in ECO PRO mode The system depends on the timeliness and quality of the navigation data The navigation data can be updated Display Display in the instrument cluster The note about a route section ahead aw is made as recommendation to let the vehicle coast to a halt An additional symbol indicates the detected route section Symbol Upcoming route section Intersection or turning maneuver exit from an expressway Curve Traffic circle OOQ Display in the Head up Display The route ahead alert can also be dis played in the Head Up Display 4 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Indications on the Control Display In the indicator of the driving style analysis shown on the Control Display a note is dis played if a corresponding route section is up coming Call up the display of the driving style analysis 1 My Vehicle 2 Technology in action 3 Driving style analysis Using the route ahead assistant An upcoming route section is displayed 1 Back off the accelerator 2 Allow the vehicle to coast until the route section indicated is reached
186. el to the driv er s side when the vehicle is at a standstill Depending on the equipment version Adap tive Light Control consists of one or several systems gt Cornering light refer to page 131 gt Adaptive headlight range control refer to page 131 Activating Switch setting 20 with switched on drive ready state Corner illuminating lights In tight curves e g on mountainous roads or when turning an additional corner illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed The turning lights are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals When driving in reverse the turning lights may be automatically switched on regardless of the steering angle Self leveling headlights The self leveling headlights compensate for acceleration and braking operations in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve optimum illumination of the roadway Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has failed Have the system checked as soon as possible 131 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Lights High beam Assistant The concept The high beam Assistant detects other traffic participants early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depending on the traffic situation The assistant ensures that th
187. elated functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Only transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft 150 cm in the rear in child restraint systems provided in accordance with the age weight and size of the child Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a Suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age weight and size Children on the front passenger seat Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat ensure that the front knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated Automatic deactivation of front seat passenger airbags refer to page 138 Information WARNING Active front seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated There is risk of inju ries Make sure that the front seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up 93 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Transporting children safely Installing child restraint systems Information Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting installing and using child restraint systems WARNING The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect se
188. elves and traffic e g with the following actions Pressing the Start Stop button Releasing the parking brake Opening and closing of doors or windows Shifting the selector lever into neutral VV VV V Using vehicle equipment There is risk of accidents or injuries Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve hicle Carry remote control along when exiting and lock the vehicle lt 101 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driving Overview Automatic Hold AUTO H Establishing function readiness from Automatic Hold Press the button while pressing on the brake pedal The LED on the button lights up The indicator lamp lights up green AUTOH l V Automatic Hold is functional After every new vehicles start the last selected setting is active AUTO H Automatic Hold holding the vehicle Function readiness is established After stepping on the brake pedal e g when stopping at a traffic light the vehicle is auto matically secured against rolling park The indicator lamp lights up green Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off The brake is released automatically The indicator lamp goes out Parking The parking brake is engaged automatically if the vehicle is stopped with Automatic Hold and the drive ready state is deactivated 102 park The indicator lamp changes from green to red The parking brake is not set if the drive r
189. em is interrupted automatically in the following situations gt Ifthe driver grasps the steering wheel or if he takes over steering gt Possible on snow covered or slippery road surfaces gt When there are obstacles that are hard to overcome such as curbs gt When there are obstacles that suddenly arise gt Ifthe Park Distance Control PDC displays clearances that are too small gt Ifa maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded gt When switching to another function on the Control Display When the button is released If the tailgate is open If doors are open When setting the parking brake During acceleration VV VV VV When the brake pedal remains pressed for an extended period while the vehicle is sta tionary gt When unfastening the driver s safety belt A Check Control message is displayed Resume An interrupted parking procedure can be con tinued if needed Follow the instructions on the Control Display System limits No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assis tance in the following situations gt In tight curves Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Controls Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations gt On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads On slippery ground gt On steep uphill or downhill grades W
190. em is not fully functional in the follow ing situations and driver intervention may be necessary gt In very unfavorable weather conditions such as fog or heavy precipitation gt When detecting poorly lit road users such as pedestrians cyclists horseback riders and wagons when driving close to train or ship traffic or at animal crossings gt In tight curves on hilltops or in depres sions in cross traffic or half obscured on coming traffic on highways gt In poorly lit towns and cities or in the pres ence of highly reflective signs gt When the windshield behind the interior mirror is fogged over dirty or covered with stickers etc Fog lights Front fog lights General information The low beams must be switched on before switching on the front fog lamps Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Lights Controls Switching on off ZD Press button The green indicator lamp lights up If the automatic headlight control refer to page 130 is activated the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated the front fog lights are not switched on Instrument lighting g The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel Interior lights General information Depending on the equipment version interior lights footwell l
191. en the supports of the head restraint 96 Guide it over the head restraint of the mid dle seat 4 Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor 5 Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down 6 Lower and lock head restraints as needed Locking the doors and windows in the rear Doors Push the locking lever on the rear doors up The door can now be opened from the outside only Safety switch for the rear a Press button on the driver s door if children are being transported in the rear This locks various functions so that they can not be operated from the rear safety switch refer to page 71 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving Controls Driving Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Start Stop button The concept Pressing the Start Stop button switches drive readiness on or off Drive readiness starts with the brake pedal pressed when you press the Start Stop button Pressing the Start Stop button again switches drive readiness back off and operating readi
192. en the central or expanded area The entire area moves along with the vehicle in the direction of the steering angle and changes with the vehicle speed As the vehicle speed increases the area becomes longer and wider e g Meaning Pedestrian warning Animal warning Symbol lights up red Advance warning intervene actively by braking or mak ing an evasive maneuver Symbol flashes Acute warning intervene red and a signal immediately by braking or sounds making an evasive maneu ver The displayed symbol shows the side of the road on which the person or animal was de tected Prewarning Prewarning for persons is displayed when a person is detected in the central area immedi ately in front of the vehicle as well as on the left or right side in the extended area Prewarning for animals is displayed when an animal is detected in the front of the vehicle The driver must intervene actively when there IS a prewarning Acute warning Acute warning Is displayed if a person or an animal is detected in direct proximity if front of the vehicle The driver must immediately intervene actively when there is an acute warning Active Protection if a collision seems to be un avoidable PreCrash functions are triggered 149 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Safety Display in the Head up Display The warning is displayed simultaneously in the Head up Display and on the in
193. ent temperature and high altitude may occur If drivability problems are encountered we rec ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI num ber for a few tank fills To avoid harmful en gine deposits it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main tenance lt 253 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Wheels and tires Wheels and tires Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Tire inflation pressure Safety information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres sure influence the following gt The service life of the tires gt Road safety gt Driving comfort Checking the tire inflation pressure WARNING A tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling such as steering and braking response There is risk of an acci dent Regularly check the tire inflation pres sure and correct it as needed e g twice a mo
194. ent closing WARNING With convenient closing body parts can be jammed There is risk of injuries Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing lt 66 Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a closed vehicle door arrow with your finger and hold it there without grasping the door handle This corresponds to pressing and holding the remote control button In addition to locking the windows and the glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors fold in Opening the tailgate individually Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid This corresponds to pressing the re mote control button The situation of the doors does not change Opening and closing the trunk lid with no touch activation The concept The trunk lid can be opened and closed with no touch activation using the remote control you are carrying Two sensors detect a for ward directed foot motion in the center of the area at the rear of the car and the tailgate opens and closes Information WARNING During no contact activation vehicle parts may be touched e g hot exhaust sys tem There is risk of injuries With the foot mo tion make sure there is steady stance and do not touch the vehicle Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Opening and closing Controls If the remote control is in the sensor area the tailgate can be closed or opened inadvertently by an unconscious
195. ent the driving style the smoother the depicted route becomes ar row 1 The table of values contains stars The more efficient the driving style the more stars are in cluded in the table and the faster the bonus range increases arrow 2 If on the other hand the driving style is ineffi cient a wavy road and a reduced number of stars is displayed To assist with an efficient driving style ECO PRO tips are displayed during driving 6 DEALER 247 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Refueling Refueling Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Information CAUTION With a range of less than 30 miles 50 km it is possible that the engine will no longer have sufficient fuel Engine functions are no longer ensured There is risk of property damage Re fuel promptly lt Observe the fuel recommendation refer to page 252 prior to refueling Fuel lid Opening 1 Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap 250 2 Turn the tank lid counterclockwise 3 Place th
196. ently menu items and enter the settings used menus Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller refer to page 26 Open the Communication menu gt Turn Open the Media Radio menu oO Oo a Open destination input menu for navigation Open navigation map Open previous panel Open Options menu OPTION gt Press Operating with the controller Opening the main menu e Press button ooo a gt Move in four directions 22 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mi a g i i R a gd ig Communication Navy gation ConnectedDrive The main menu is displayed All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected 1 Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted Media Radiaq Pac bea diaiRadio Communication Navigation ConnectedDrive Fah if 2 Press the controller Menu items in the Owner s Manual In the Owner s Manual menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks e g System settings Changing between panels After a menu item is selected e g System settings a new panel is displayed gt Move the controller to the left Closes current display and shows previous display RACK gt ma Press button The previous display opens Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 gt Move the
197. er profiles 3 Select profile 4 Last seat position automatic The adjustment procedure is interrupted gt When a seat position switch is pressed gt When a button of the seat mirror and steering wheel memory is pressed briefly Alarm system The concept When the vehicle is locked the vehicle alarm system responds to gt Opening a door the hood or the trunk lid gt Movements in the interior gt Changes in the vehicle tilt e g during at tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the car gt Disconnected battery voltage The alarm system briefly signals tampering gt By sounding an acoustic alarm gt By switching on the hazard warning sys tem gt By flashing the high beams Arming and disarming the alarm system When you unlock or lock the vehicle either with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac cess the alarm system is disarmed or armed at the same time Door lock and armed alarm system The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened when the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock Trunk lid and armed alarm system The trunk lid can be opened even when the alarm system is armed After the trunk lid is closed it is locked and monitored again when the doors are locked The hazard warning system flashes once Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation D To switch off the alarm press any button Press b
198. ered with stickers etc gt During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle delivery 155 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Safety A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional Displaying warnings Depending on the selected warning settings e g warning time more warnings can be dis played However there may also be an excess of premature warnings of critical vehicles For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is gov erned by the following FCC ID gt NBGOO9014A Compliance statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful inter ference and gt this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment 156 Side collision warning The concept The system helps to avoid imminent side colli sions Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the area next to the vehicle in the speed range from approx 45 mph 70 km h to ap prox 130 mph 210 km h The front camera determines the lane marking positions If e g another vehicle is detected next to t
199. erty damage Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad justment lt 87 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Adjusting Overview The procedure stops when a switch for adjust ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed Front The comfort function is not available on the driver s seat while driving Safety mode While driving a profile can be called up on the driver s seat Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is completed BMW Touch Command The memory function can also be operated on the front passenger seat and in the rear via BMW Touch Command Massage function The concept Depending on the program the massage func tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood circulation and can avoid fatigue Storing 1 Set the desired position 2 SET Press button The writing on the button lights up 3 Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit Lighting of the writing goes out General information Eight different massage programs can be se lected gt Pelvis activation Upper body activation Full body activation SET Button was pressed inadvertently Back massage Press button again Shoulder massage Lighting of the writing goes out Lumbar massage Upper body training YOY Y N NM y Calling up settings Full body training Comfort function Press selected button 1 or 2 The
200. es in order to finish synchronization Once synchroni zation is complete the programmed func tion will be carried out Reprogramming individual buttons T 2 3 Turn on operations Press the interior mirror button to be pro grammed As soon as the interior mirror LED starts flashing slowly hold the hand held trans mitter for the system to be controlled ap prox 1 to 3 in 2 5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior mirror The required distance depends on the manual transmit ter Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Interior equipment Controls 4 Likewise press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand held trans mitter 5 Release both buttons as soon as the inte rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly or lights up continuously The LED flashing more rapidly or being continuously light up indicates that the button on the interior mirror has been programmed The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior rearview mirror If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds change the distance and repeat the step Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts Canada if programming with the hand held transmitter was interrupted hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand held transmitter button for 2 sec onds Controls WARNING Body p
201. etters or num bers 2 OK confirm entry Symbol Function lt Press the controller delete the let ter or number Hold controller down delete all let ters and numbers 24 Switching between cases letters and numbers Depending on the menu you can switch be tween entering upper and lower case letters and numbers Symbol Function ABC Enter the letters 1 4 Enter the numbers abc or Change between capital and f ABC lower case letters Entry comparison When entering names and addresses the choice is narrowed down with every letter en tered and letters may be added automatically Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle gt Only those letters are offered during input for which data Is available gt Destination search names of locations may be entered in languages available through iDrive Using alphabetical lists For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en tries the letters for which there is an entry are displayed at the left edge 1 Turn the controller to the left or right quickly All letters for which there are entries are displayed on the left side 2 Select the first letter of the desired entry The cursor jumps to the first entry of the selected letter Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Operating via touchscreen General information The Control Display is equipped with a touch screen Touch touchscreen with your
202. ety sys tems can be individually configured The indi vidual settings are activated and stored for the profile currently used As soon as a Setting is changed on the menu all settings of the menu are activated the button lights up orange Rear bumper Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra eens nen cay i MNR between the following settings dar sensors clean and unobstructed l ALL ON All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions 157 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Safety INDIVIDUAL the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in dividually switched off Press and hold this button All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off Press Status button Button lights up green all Intelli gent Safety systems are switched on Button lights up orange some In telligent Safety systems are switched off or settings for the sub functions were changed o Button does not light up all Intel ligent Safety systems are switched off Issued warning Lamp in the exterior mirror f __ J WARNING The lamp in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates An active steering in tervention takes place to prevent collisions and maintain the vehicle within its own lane The steering intervention can be
203. f the trunk lid gt Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler ation and braking maneuvers Take corners gently 239 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving tips ecm Saving fuel Saving fuel Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems General information Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sions Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors Carrying out certain measures such as a mod erate driving style and regular maintenance can influence fuel consumption and the envi ronmental impact Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption Remove attached parts following use Remove auxiliary mirrors roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption 240 Close the windows and glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumpti
204. far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground gt Switch on the hazard warning system Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake gt Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock gt Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out side the immediate area in a safe place such as behind a guardrail gt If necessary set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance Mobility System The concept With the Mobility System minor tire damage can be sealed quickly to enable continued travel To accomplish this sealant is pumped into the tires which seals the damage from the inside The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure Information gt Follow the instructions on using the Mobi lity System found on the compressor and sealant container Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Wheels and tires Mobility gt Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec tive if the tire puncture measures approx 1 8 in 4 mm or more gt Contact a dealer s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable gt If possible do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire gt Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel
205. features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems General information Depending on the situation the vehicle is in one of the three states gt Idle state gt Operating readiness gt Drive readiness Idle state The concept The vehicle is switched off in idle state All electronic systems power consumers are de activated General information The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from the outside and after exiting and locking Information WARNING An unsecured vehicle can put itself into motion and roll away There is risk of an acci dent Before exiting secure the vehicle against rolling In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away observe the following gt Set the parking brake On uphill grades or on a slope turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb gt On uphill grades or on a slope also secure the vehicle e g with a wheel chock lt WARNING Unattended children or animals can move the vehicle and endanger themselves and traffic e g with the following actions Pressing the Start Stop button Releasing the parking brake Opening and closing of doors or wind
206. fingers Do not use any objects Opening the main menu a Tap symbol Media Rad io hee alien aes F Communication Navigation ConnectedDrive All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu Selecting menu items Tap desired menu item Media Radiq Cac eer edia Radio Communication Navigation ConnectedDrive Menu items in the Owner s Manual In the Owner s Manual menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks e g System settings Changing between panels After a menu item is selected a new panel is displayed Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Vehicle settings System settings Driver profiles Vehicle status Technology in action Driving information The white arrow indicates that additional pan els can be called up gt Swipe to the left gt Tap symbol New display is opened Opening recently used menus a Tap symbol twice Changing settings Settings such as volumes can be changed via the touchscreen gt Slide in the selected field to the right or left until the desired setting is displayed gt Tap symbol Volume settings Speed volume __ Relative to active audio source e _ Gong _ Activating deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box The checkbox indicates whether the func tion is activated or deactivated Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the
207. follows 1 Menu Security information 2 Tap symbol 3 Tap the symbol three times To end the display J Tap symbol Profile The concept In the profiles individual settings for several drivers can be saved and called up again at a later time General information There are three profiles with which personal vehicle settings can be stored Every remote control has one of these profiles assigned If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con trol the assigned personal profile will be acti vated All settings stored in the profile are au tomatically applied If several drivers use their own remote control the vehicle will adjust the personal settings 58 during unlocking These settings are also re stored if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different remote control Changes to the settings are automatically saved in the profile currently activated If another profile is selected via iDrive the set tings saved in it will be applied automatically The new profile is assigned to the remote con trol currently used There is an additional profile available that is not assigned to any remote control Just drive off guest It can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without changing the personal pro files Active profile After switching on the Control Display the name of the active profile is displayed It is possible to jump directly to the Profile
208. functions Activate deactivate assistance functions More than one assistance function can be ac tive at the same time The following assistance functions can be manually activated gt VY Parking aid lines gt Pa Obstacle marking gt Carwash The following assistance functions are auto matically displayed gt Side protection refer to page 191 gt Rim protection refer to page 191 gt Door opening angle refer to page 191 189 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 eiil Driver assistance systems lines 1 2 ak la Wav ee ac B di 1 Position the vehicle so that the red turning radius line leads to within the limits of the parking space 2 Turn the steering wheel to the point where the green pathway line covers the corre sponding turning radius line Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads Pathway lines depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements Turning circle lines Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC sensors Obstacle markings can be shown in the cam era image Their colored margins of the obstacle mark ings match the markings of the PDC Turning circle lines can only be superimposed on the rearview camera image together with pathway lines Turning circle lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on
209. g refer to page 91 BOE Ambient air package refer to page 211 Climate control functions in detail Switching the system on off Switching on Press any button except gt Rear window defroster Left side of Air volume button Seat heating Seat ventilation VV V OV SYNC program Switch off gt Complete system 203 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Climate control 5 amp Press and hold the left button on the driver s side until the control clicks off gt On the front passenger side Sa SE Press and hold the left button on the front passenger side Temperature Turn the ring to set the desired temperature The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible if needed by using the maximum cooling or heating ca pacity and then keeps it constant Do not rapidly switch between different tem perature settings Otherwise the automatic cli mate control will not have sufficient time to ad just the set temperature Information ttt Symbol is displayed permanently on the display of the automatic climate control Cooling function The car s interior can only be cooled with the engine running Press button The LED lights up The air will be cooled and dehumidi fied and depending on the temperature set ting warmed again Depending on the weather the windshield and side windows may fog up briefly when the en gi
210. g down going all the way to first gear if needed Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina tion on the brake pads are furthered by the fol lowing circumstances gt Low mileage gt Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all gt Infrequent use of the brakes 236 Things to remember when driving Corrosion will built up when the maximum pressure applied to the brake pads during braking Is not reached thus discs don t get cleaned Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re sponse generally that cannot be corrected Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control condensation water develops collecting under neath the vehicle These traces of water under the vehicle are normal Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Loading Drivingtips tips Loading Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Information WARNING High gross weight can overheat the tires damage them internally and
211. g roads gt In heavy traffic gt On slippery roads in fog snow or rain or on a loose road surface There is risk of accidents or risk of property damage Only use the system if driving at con stant speed is possible lt 175 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driver assistance systems Overview Buttons on the steering wheel Press but Function Cruise control on off refer to page 176 ma O of Store maintain speed refer to SET page 176 RES Pause cruise control refer to page 176 CNCL Continue cruise control refer to page 177 Rocker switch Maintain store change speed refer to page 177 Controls Switching on Press button on the steering wheel The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the current speed Cruise control is active DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be switched on if needed Switch off WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation Based on the limits of the sys tem it cannot independently react to all traffic situations There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the re spective situations lt 176 Press button on the steering wheel The displays go out The stored desired speed is deleted Interrupt
212. ge 286 close to the interior mirror Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Voice activation system Ataglance a glance Environmental conditions gt Say the commands numbers and letters smoothly and with normal volume empha sis and speed gt Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system gt Keep the doors windows and glass sun roof closed to prevent noise interference gt Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking 35 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GECUL BMW Touch Command BMW Touch Command Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems BMW Touch Command The concept Important functions of the vehicle can be used via BMW Touch Command gt Seat adjustments for front passenger seat and seats in the rear Climate control in the rear Sun protection Ambient light Ambient light accent Bowers amp Wilkins loudspeaker lighting Audio sources front Rear entertainment VV Vv Vv VV VV Some functions of the telephone in the
213. gering of the airbag system There is risk of injuries Do not touch individual components lt WARNING Improperly executed work can lead to failure malfunction or unintentional triggering of the airbag system In the case of a malfunc tion the airbag system could not trigger as in tended in the event of an accident despite re 137 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Safety spective accident severity There is risk of injuries or danger to life Have the airbag sys tem checked repaired dismantled and scrap ped by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop lt Correct function e 3 When drive readiness is switched on rs the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby in dicates the function readiness of the entire air bag system and the belt tensioners Airbag system malfunctioning gt Warning lamp does not come on when drive readiness is switched on gt The warning lamp lights up continuously Automatic deactivation of the front seat passenger airbags The concept The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body s re sistance Front knee and side airbag on the front pas senger s side are either activated or deacti vated Information Before transporting a child on the front pas senger seat refer to the safety notes and in structions for children on the front
214. h and turn switch see Controller 22 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Q Queuing Assistant see Steering and lane guidance assistant including Traffic Jam Assist 177 R Radiator fluid 277 Radio 6 Radio operated key see Re mote control 54 Rain sensor 104 Rear automatic climate con trol 207 Rear axle steering 166 Rear center armrest 227 Rear collision prevention 159 Rear collision warning 159 Rear cooler 223 Rear drink holder 228 Rear seats 78 Rear seats basic position 80 Rear vanity mirror 86 Rearview camera see Sur round View 187 Rearview camera without Surround View 184 Rearview mirror 85 Rear window defroster 206 Recirculated air mode 205 Recommended fuel grade 252 Recommended tire brands 259 Refueling 250 Remaining range 123 Remote control key 54 Remote control malfunc tion 62 Remote control univer sal 215 Remote control with dis play 55 Replace front fog lamps 282 Replace front lamps 282 Replace headlamps 282 Replace key lights 282 Replace LED front fog lamps 282 Replace LED headlights 282 Replace light emitting diodes LEDs 282 Replacement fuse 285 Replace tail lamps 282 Replacing parts 281 Replacing wheels tires 258 Reporting safety malfunc tions 10 RES CNCL button see Active Cruise Control ACC 168 RES CNCL button see Cruise control 175 Reserve warning see Range 123 Reset Tire Pressure Monito
215. he vehicle and if there is a danger of collision with this vehicle the system helps the driver to avoid the collision via steering intervention Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess visi bility and traffic situation There is risk of an ac cident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations lt Functional requirements A prerequisite for activating the side collision warning with steering intervention is that the camera detects the lane markings Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Controls Overview Camera Button in the vehicle D The camera is installed near the interior rear gt view mirror Intelligent Safety Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear Radar sensors er Switching on off The radar sensors are located in the bumpers Switching on automatically The side collision warning is automatically acti vated after departure if the function was switched on the last time the engine was stop ped Switching on off manually A Press button S The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off all systems are now switched on Configure INDIVIDUAL depending on the equipment version the Intelligent Saf
216. he Control Display gy Parking assistant is activated automatically Switching on with reverse gear Shift into reverse The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display To activate Parking Assistant Switch off The system can be deactivated as follows gt Py Press button Signal tone for switching suitable parking spaces on off About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Parking 4 Parking Assistant 5 Sound if parking space detected Settings are stored Display on the Control Display System activated deactivated Symbol Meaning a Gray the system is not available White the system is available but not activated ey The system is activated System status gt Colored symbols arrows on the side of the vehicle illustrated Parking assistant is activated and search for parking space ac tive gt Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol When the parking assistant is active Suitable parking spaces are high lighted in color and a signal tone sounds Switch signal tone on off refer to page 195 gt Ifa diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly detected the system automatically adjusts the suitable parking method In the case of parking spaces suitable for parallel and diagonal parking a selection menu is displayed In this case the desired parking method must be selected ma
217. he following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful inter ference and gt this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Rear collision prevention The concept Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle If a vehicle approaches from the rear at a cer tain speed the system responds as follows gt Active Protection if a collision seems to be unavoidable PreCrash functions are trig gered The system is automatically active after every driving off The system is deactivated in the following sit uations gt If reverse gear is engaged gt Ifthe trailer power socket is in use e g during operation with trailer or bicycle rack Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess visi bility and traffic situation There is risk of an ac cident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations lt Overview Radar sensors gt i _ ee m OEA Fq The radar sensors are located in the rear bumper Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra dar sensors clean and unobstructed System limits The system may not be f
218. he rear press button arrow 1 and fold the head restraint backward gt To the front fold head restraint forward un til the head restraint engages 83 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Adjusting Adjusting the height Manual head restraints i The height of the outer head restraints can be adjusted gt To raise push gt To lower press button arrow 1 and push headrest down Power head restraints Information WARNING Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint There is risk of injuries Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint lt Button in the vehicle The height of the head restraint can be ad justed electrically The height adjustment of the head restraint is deactivated when the safety switch for the rear windows refer to page 71 has been pressed 84 Adjusting the side extensions Fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the resting position Pillows for head restraints in the rear Only use the pillow when the vehicle is switched off 1 There are two pushbuttons on the upper tab of the pillow Pull the upper tab through the loop on the top of the head restraint A 2 Close both pushbuttons 3 The head restraint folds into the topmost position Close the pushbutton on the Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Adjusting
219. hen dry with a soft cloth Plastic components These include Imitation leather surfaces Roofliner Lamp lenses Instrument cluster cover Matt black spray coated components VV VV VV Painted parts in the interior Clean with a microfiber cloth Dampen cloth lightly with water Do not soak the roofliner CAUTION Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol vents such as lacquer thinners heavy duty grease removers fuel or such can damage plastic parts There is risk of property damage Clean with a microfiber cloth Dampen cloth lightly with water lt Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety 293 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Care WARNING Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing Missing protective effect of the safety belts There is risk of injuries or danger to life Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the safety belts Use only a mild soapy solution with the safety belts clipped into their buckles Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety belts until they are dry Carpets and floor mats WARNING Objects in the driver s floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal There is risk of an accident Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver s floor area Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
220. here is direct feedback to the exercise executed by a display of stars and a color bar display gt Green exercise was correctly executed gt Gray the pressure was too weak gt Red the pressure was too weak The goal of the exercises is to keep the bar display in the green area as long as possible Every exercise is evaluated by awarding stars Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Adjusting Controls Switching on On the screens in the rear 1 My Vehicle 2 Seat comfort 3 BMW Vitality Program Switch off On the screens in the rear 1 Press left arrow button on the remote con trol in the rear 2 Stop BMW Touch Command The vitality program can also be operated us ing BMW Touch Command Seat and armrest heating General information The system heats seats and armrests as needed Seat heating can also be used without armrest heating Overview Front Seat and armrest heating Seat and armrest heating Switching on al Press button once for each tempera ture level Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli mate control display If the trip is continued within approx 15 mi nutes the seat and armrest heating is acti vated automatically with the temperature se lected last When ECO PRO refer to page 241 is acti vated the heater output is reduced Switch off ef Press button and hold until bar display on the climate control
221. hicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to Instrument cluster The concept The instrument cluster is a variable display In the event of a program change the display rendition adapts to the respective program through the Driving Dynamics Control The change of the display type can be deactivated via iDrive Overview the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Some of the displays in the instrument cluster may differ from the way they are shown in this Owner s Manual 1 Fuelgauge 118 2 Speedometer 3 Time 118 External temperature 118 Driver assistance system displays 4 Tachometer 118 113 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Displays Selection lists 121 ECO PRO displays 241 Navigation display Messages e g Check Control 5 Enginetemperature 118 6 Transmission display 106 Status Driving Dynamics Control 110 Adjusting the view The concept In addition to the driving program views the in strument cluster can be adjusted to three dif ferent operating modes Adjusting About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Displays Ins
222. ht be detected late or not at all When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve If the system deceler ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler ating After releasing the gas pedal the system is re activated and controls speed independently Driving away In some situations the vehicle cannot drive off automatically for example gt On steep inclines gt From behind bumps in the road In these cases step on the accelerator pedal be I A A Le ee Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Controls Weather In the event of unfavorable weather and light conditions e g if there is rain snowfall slush fog or glare this may result in poorer recogni tion of vehicles as well as short term interrup tions for vehicles that are already detected Drive attentively and react to the current traffic situation If necessary intervene actively e g by braking steering or evading Radar sensor For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is gov erned by the following FCC ID gt OAYARS3 A Compliance statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful inter ference and gt this device must accept
223. ht alloy wheels care 293 Light control 131 Lighting 129 Lights 129 Lights and bulbs 282 Light switch 129 List of all messages 40 Load 238 Loading 237 Lock door 62 Locking automatic 68 Locking settings 67 Locking via door lock 62 Locking with remote con trol 60 Lock power window 71 Locks doors and win dows 96 Low beams 129 Low beams automatic see High beam Assistant 132 Lower back support 77 Luggage rack see Roof mounted luggage rack 238 Lumbar support 77 M Maintenance 279 Maintenance require ments 279 Maintenance service require ments 119 Maintenance system BMW 279 Make up mirror 217 Malfunction displays see Check Control 114 Manual air distribution 205 Manual air flow 205 Manual brake see Parking brake 100 Manual mode Steptronic transmission 106 Manual operation door lock 62 Manual operation exterior mirrors 85 Manual operation fuel filler flap 250 Marking run flat tires 260 Massage seat front 88 Massage seat rear 88 Master key see Remote con trol 54 Maximum cooling 204 Maximum speed display 120 Maximum speed winter tires 259 Measurement units of 39 Medical kit 287 Memory for seat mirrors steering wheel 87 Menu in instrument clus ter 121 Menus 22 Menus operating iDrive 21 Messages 40 Messages see Check Con trol 114 Microfilter 206 Minimum tread tires 258 Mirror 85 Mirror memory 87 Mobile communication devi ces
224. ic and may not be available The software is first transferred into the vehicle and can then be installed The software can be installed at a time different from the time of transfer Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 General settings Ataglance We Flavors The software can be transferred while driving and if the journey is interrupted it will resume automatically the next time the vehicle is driven All other functions remain available dur ing the transfer Wireless reception must be available for the transfer to take place Installation of the software must only be car ried out while the vehicle is stationary About iDrive Turn on operations My Vehicle System settings Software update Update software TeleService ae Se SS Load update The update is loaded however not instal led 8 gt Install software The loaded update is installed This step can be carried out at a later point in time gt If the update should not be installed it can be removed again Remove update The following steps are omitted 9 OK 10 Await the updating 11 Confirm system restart Restoring the software version The software version before the last software update or the version before the first software update can be restored The software may only be restored when the vehicle is stationary About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings 3 Software update 4
225. icle is provided in the first chapter Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner s Handbook for Vehicle User s manual for Navigation Entertainment Communication The Owner s Manual for Navigation Entertain ment and Communication is available as printed book at your service center The topics of Navigation Entertainment and Communication can be retrieved on the Con trol Display via the Integrated Owner s Manual and in the BMW Driver s Guide app Additional sources of information A dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop will be glad to an swer additional questions at any time Information on BMW e g on technology is available on the Internet www bmwusa com BMW Driver s Guide App The Owner s Manual is available in many coun tries as an app Additional information on the Internet www bmw com bmw_drivers_guide Symbols and displays Symbols in the Owner s Manual FN Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle Marks the end of a specific item of information amp Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment Identifies display texts in vehicle used to select individual functions lt Verbal instructions to use with the voic
226. if necessary gt Backrest and head restraint of the front passenger seat are inclined forward gt The tilt of the screen in the rear is adjusted to the rest incline of the passenger s seat gt The head restraint on the backrest of the front passenger seat folds out gt The backrest of the rear seat inclines to the rear The adjusted end position can be manually ad justed refer to page 78 and stored using the Memory function refer to page 87 if needed Information WARNING If the Captain s chair is activated the view on the right exterior mirror can be ob structed There is risk of an accident Adjust the front passenger seat such that the view on the exterior mirror is not obstructed lt Overview i Captain s chair Switching on Press button a 90 Resetting to standard position S SSE e Press button to reset to standard po bms sition The process is canceled if the button is pressed again Vitality programs The concept Different muscles can be trained using the vi tality program in the rear Active movements help in preventing signs of fatigue General information After each start of the vitalization program there is a calibration run Here the intensity of the exercises is set individually Videos on the respective screens in the rear show which motions should be executed A display informs about the still remaining dura tion of each exercise T
227. ife 01 FE BMW Longlife 14 FE The oil rating BMW Longlife 14 FE is only suitable for particular gasoline motors More information about suitable engine oil rat ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re quested from a dealer s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available up to 1 US quart liter of an en gine oil with the following oil rating can be added Gasoline engine API SL or superior oil rating Engine oil change CAUTION Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage There is risk of property damage Do not exceed the service data indi cated in the vehicle The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you let the dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop change the motor oil 275 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Engine oil BMW recommends Original BMW Engine Oil 276 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Coolant Mobility Coolant Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and
228. igent Safety sys tems can be individually configured The indi vidual settings are activated and stored for the Intelligent Safety profile currently used As soon as a setting Is changed on the menu all settings of the menu are activated the button lights up orange Press button repeatedly It is switched between the following settings ALL ON All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions INDIVIDUAL the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings 145 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Safety Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in dividually switched off Press and hold this button All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off Press Status button Button lights up green all Intelli gent Safety systems are switched on Button lights up orange some In telligent Safety systems are switched off or settings for the sub functions were changed o Button does not light up all Intel ligent Safety systems are switched off Warning with braking function Display If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head up Display Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver The red symbol is displayed and a sig nal sounds Braking intervention The warning prompts
229. ights entry lamps door handle lighting and speaker lighting are automatically controlled Overview Buttons in the vehicle Interior lights 215 Reading light eading lights Switching the interior lights on and off Press button 7 To switch off permanently press the button and hold for approx 3 seconds The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can be switched on and off independently The button is located in the rear roofliner Switching the reading lamps on and off manually Press button The reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lights Ambient light General information Depending on the equipment version lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the car s in terior Switching on off The ambient light is switched on when the ve hicle is unlocked and switched off when the vehicle is locked If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive it will not be switched on when the vehicle is unlocked Selecting color scheme About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Lighting Interior lighting Color Select desired setting a pL SS SS 133 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Lights Setting the brightness About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Lighting Interior lighting Brightness oS a fy Se Select desired setting Dimmed when driving About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle sett
230. in carbon monoxide an odorless and color less but highly toxic gas In enclosed areas ex haust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle There is danger to life Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila tion CAUTION The compressor can overheat during ex tended operation There is risk of property damage Do not run the compressor for more than 10 min lt Let the compressor run for max 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla tion pressure of approx 2 5 bar 262 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Wheels and tires Mobility While the tire is being filled with sealant the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx 5 bar Do not switch off the compres sor at this point If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not reached 1 Switch off the compressor 2 Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel 3 Drive 33 ft 10 m forward and back to dis tribute the sealant in the tire 4 Inflate the tire again using the compressor If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be reached contact your dealer s service cen ter or another qualified service center or repair shop Stowing the Mobility System 1 Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con tainer from the wheel 2 After pressing the red unlock button on the compressor remove the sealing container 3 Wrap the empty sealant container in suita ble material to a
231. ing EJ When active press the button The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations gt When the brakes are applied gt If selector lever position D is disengaged gt If DTC Dynamic Traction Control is acti vated or DSC is deactivated gt When DSC is actively controlling stability Maintaining storing and changing the speed Information WARNING The desired speed can be incorrectly ad justed or called up by mistake There is risk of an accident Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and ac tively interfere in the respective situations lt Maintaining storing the speed Press button Or SET Do Press the rocker switch while the system is in terrupted Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems When the system is switched on the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed This is displayed refer to page 177 in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be switched on if needed Changing the speed Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set If active the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear gt Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the resistance point the desired speed in creases or decreases by 1 mph 1 km h gt Each ti
232. ing pay attention to the following gt The system recognizes capital and lower case letters For the input of upper lower case letters and numbers it may be neces sary to switch to the corresponding input mode e g when upper and lower case let ters are written the same way Switching between cases numbers and letters refer to page 24 gt Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display gt Always enter associated characters such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized Possible input de pends on the set language Where neces sary enter special characters via the con troller gt To delete a character swipe to the left on the touchpad gt To enter a blank space slide to the right in the center of the touchpad gt To enter a hyphen slide to the right in the upper area of the touchpad Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 iDrive Ataglance a glance gt To enter an underscore swipe to the right in the lower area of the touchpad Using interactive map and Internet Via touch pad move the interactive map in the navigation system and Internet sites Function Controls Move interactive map or Internet sites Swipe in the ap propriate direc tion Enlarge shrink interactive Drag in or out on map or Internet sites the touchpad with fingers Display the menu or Tap once open a link in the Inter net Changing settings You m
233. ing position Removing The head restraints cannot be removed Rear head restraints Information WARNING A missing protective effect due to re moved or not correctly adjusted head re straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area There is risk of injuries Install head restraints on occupied seats prior to driving and make sure that the center of the head re straint supports the back of the head at eye level lt WARNING Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area There is risk of injuries gt Do not use seat or head restraint covers gt Do not hang objects e g clothes hangers directly on the head restraint gt Only use accessories that have been de termined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint gt Do not use any accessories e g pillows while driving Correctly adjusted head restraint General information A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head Adjusting the center head restraint To improve the view to the rear the center head restraint can be folded to the rear Only push the head restraint down if no one will be sitting in the center seat T gt To t
234. ings Lighting Interior lighting 2 a Dimmed while driving The interior lighting is dimmed for some lights while driving Panoramic glass sunroof lighting If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or the sliding visor closed lighting of the panoramic glass sunroof is switched off When closing the sliding visors only the light ing for the area in question is switched off BMW Touch Command The ambient light can also be operated using BMW Touch Command Bowers amp Wilkins High End Surround Sound System General information Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated Brightness can be individually set Switching on off The speaker lighting is switched on when the vehicle is unlocked and switched off when the vehicle is locked 134 If the speakers are muted speaker lighting will be switched off Setting the brightness About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Lighting Bowers amp Wilkins Brightness oor YY SS Select desired setting BMW Touch Command The operation of the Bowers amp Wilkins high end surround sound system is also possible with BMW Touch Command Ambient light accent General information The ambient light accent illuminates the door pillar in the rear Switching on off The ambient light accent is switched on when the vehicle is unlocked and switched off when the vehicle is locked When opening a rear door the ambient light accent of
235. inimum distance from glass sunroof 31 5 inches 80 cm Automatic car washes Information Note the following gt Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms Fold in the exterior mirrors otherwise they may be damaged depending on the width of the vehicle Deactivate the rain sensor refer to page 104 to avoid unintentional wiper acti vation In some cases an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system Follow the instruc tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm refer to page 70 CAUTION Too high guide rails in car washes can damage body parts There is risk of property damage Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in 10 cm lt Before driving into a car wash In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll ina car wash take the following steps iF 2 3 Drive into the car wash Engage selector lever position N Deactivating Automatic Hold refer to page 102 Release the parking brake Switch off drive readiness 291 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Care In this way operating readiness remains switched on and a Check Control mes sage is displayed The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N A signal sounds when an attempt is made to l
236. ion for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Roller sunblinds in the side windows Overview Buttons for the roller sunblinds in the side windows GA Controls A Press the button to open the closed roller sunblind or to close the open roller sunblind If the button is pressed again during the move ment the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo site direction Glass sunroof General information The glass sunroof and the front sliding visor can be operated together or separately using the same switch The rear sliding visor is oper ated using separate buttons The glass sunroof is operational when the standby state is switched on Information WARNING Body parts can be jammed on operating the glass sunroof There is risk of injuries Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos ing lt Opening and closing WARNING Unattended children or animals can move the vehicle and endanger themselves and traffic e g with the following actions Pressing the Start Stop button Releasing the parking brake Opening and closing of doors or windows Shifting the selector lever into neutral VV VV OV Using vehicle equipment There is risk of accidents or injuries Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve hicle Carry remote control along when exiting and lock the vehicle lt Overview 1 Open close the glass sunroof sliding visor Wi
237. ion or natural con taminants such as tree resin or pollen can af fect the vehicle s paintwork Tailor the fre quency and extent of your car care to these influences Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel oil grease or bird droppings must be removed im mediately to prevent the finish from being al tered or discolored Matte finish Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte finish These are availa ble from a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Leather care Remove dust from the leather often using a cloth or vacuum cleaner Otherwise particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface To guard against discoloration such as from clothing provide leather care roughly every two months Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Care Mobility Clean light colored leather more frequently be cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible Use leather care products otherwise dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface Suitable care products are available from a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner If upholstery is very dirty e g with beverage stains use a soft sponge or micr
238. ions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems found in the approval documents on labels on the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer s service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop The information in the vehicle documents al ways has priority roof racks or spoiler The heights can deviate for example due to the selected special equip ment tires load and chassis version inches mm 85 4 2 169 Inches mm 74 9 1 902 inches mm 57 8 1 467 Inches mm 58 2 1 479 inches mm 201 2 5 108 inches mm 206 6 5 248 inches mm 120 9 3 070 inches mm 126 4 3 210 ft m 41 1 12 5 ft m 42 42 4 12 8 12 9 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Technical data Reference Weights Approved gross vehicle weight los kg 5 705 2 588 Load lbs kg 960 435 Approved front axle load los kg 2 840 1 288 Approved rear axle load los kg 3 060 1 388 Approved roof load capacity los kg 220 100 Cargo area capacity cu ft 18 2 Canada trunk capacity cu ft l 18 2 515 Approved gross vehicle weight los kg 5 450 2 472 Load lbs kg 960 435 Approved front axle load los kg 2 585 1 173 Approved rear axle load los kg 3 030 1 374 Approved roof load capacity los kg 220 100 Cargo area capacity cu ft 18 2 Canada trunk capacity cu ft l 18 2 515 Approved gross vehicle weight los kg 5 870 2 663 Load lbs kg 960 435 Approved front axl
239. irect ventilation If the vents are fully or partly closed the air is directly routed into the car s interior Indirect ventilation can also be adjusted on the Control Display Front ventilation j zy Q j gt Lever for changing the air flow direction arrow 1 gt Thumbwheel for continuous opening and closing of the vents arrow 2 gt Touch sensor or thumbwheel to vary the temperature arrow 3 With touch sensor push the marking in the desired direction Toward blue colder Toward red warmer Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Climate control Controls The set interior temperature for the driver and passenger are not changed Adjusting the ventilation gt Ventilation for cooling Direct vent in your direction when vehicle s interior is too hot gt Draft free ventilation Adjust the vent to let the air flow past the occupants Indirect ventilation Air is indirectly routed into the car s interior About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Climate functions he SoS Indirect ventilation Ventilation in rear center gt Lever for changing the air flow direction arrow 1 gt Thumbwheels to vary the temperature ar row 2 Toward blue colder Toward red warmer Lateral ventilation gt Lever for changing the air flow direction arrow 1 gt Thumbwheel for continuous opening and closing of the vents arrow 2 Rear aut
240. is driving mode is active 246 Color code blue arrow 1 and symbol arrow 2 driving condition Coasting Displaying EfficientDynamics info 1 My Vehicle 2 Technology in action 3 EfficientDynamics Deactivating the system manually The function can be deactivated individually on the ECO PRO menu The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used ECO PRO driving style analysis The concept In this situation the system helps develop an especially efficient driving style and to con serve fuel For this purpose the driving style is analyzed The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display Using this indication the individual driving style can be oriented toward conserving fuel The current trip is assessed The range of the vehicle can be extended by an efficient driving style This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Saving fuel i ee tips Functional requirement This function is available in ECO PRO mode Calling up ECO PRO driving style analysis 1 My Vehicle 2 Technology in action 3 Driving style analysis Display on the Control Display The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal ysis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup table The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv ing style The more effici
241. isions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Overview Switches in the vehicle The light switch elements is located next to the steering wheel Light functions Symbol Function Front fog lights Lights off Daytime running lights Parking lights gOS Function Automatic headlight control Adaptive Light Control Low beams wa wy Z OU GIB Instrument lighting e N LAT Right roadside parking lamp Left roadside parking lamp YR J ZIN Parking lights cornering lights and roadside parking lights General information Position of switch 0 D 20 If the driver s door is opened when the drive ready state is switched off the exterior lighting is automatically switched off at these switch settings Parking lights Position of switch D 02 The vehicle is illuminated on all sides Do not use the parking lights for extended pe riods otherwise they might drain the battery and disable drive readiness When parking switch on the one sided road side parking lamp refer to page 130 Low beams Position of switch 2D 129 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Lights The low beams light up when the drive ready state is switched on Roadside parking lights When the vehicle is parked a one sided road side parking lamp can be switched on Press button Function Right roadside parking lamp on off Left roadside pa
242. ith accumulations of leaves snow in the parking space With a mounted emergency wheel gt Incase of changes to an already measured parking space Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances gt For small children and animals gt For persons with certain clothing e g coats gt With external interference of the ultra sound e g from passing vehicles or loud machines gt When sensors are dirty iced over dam aged or out of position gt Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity rain snowfall ex treme heat or strong wind gt With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles With thin or wedge shaped objects gt With moving objects With elevated protruding objects such as ledges or cargo With objects with corners and sharp edges gt With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences gt For objects with porous surfaces Low objects already displayed e g curbs can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of the vehicle is not taken into account by the system It can happen that parking spaces are detected that are not suitable or suitable parking spaces are not detected Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed The parking assistant failed Have the system checked Cross traffic war
243. ition is reached Backrest width Adjustable backrest width before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat open the backrest width completely Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position Child seat security The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas ten child restraint systems The front passenger safety belt can be perma nently locked to fasten child restraint systems Locking the safety belt 1 Pull out the strap completely 2 Secure the child restraint system with the belt 3 Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system The safety belt is locked Unlocking the safety belt 1 Unbuckle the belt buckle 2 Remove the child restraint system 3 Allow the strap to be pulled in completely Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Transporting children safely Controls LATCH child restraint system LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil dren Information Pay attention to the operating and safety infor mation of the child restraint system manufac turer when installing and using LATCH child restraint fixing system Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors General information The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb 30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnes
244. jammed when the hood is opened There is risk of property damage Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood lt Replacing the front wiper blades 1 To change the wiper blades fold up refer to page 105 the wiper arms 2 Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind shield 3 Press button arrow 1 and pull out the wiper blade arrow 2 4 Insert the new wiper blade and press it on until it you hear it snap into the holder 5 Fold down the wipers 281 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Replacing components Lights and bulbs General information Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu tion to vehicle safety All headlights and lights are made using LED or laser technology The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you let a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop perform the work in case of a malfunction Information Lights and bulbs DANGER There can be high voltage in the lighting system There is danger to life The manufac turer of your vehicle recommends that the work on the lighting system including bulb re placement be performed by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or re pair shop Light emitting diodes LEDs Some items of equipment use light emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source Thes
245. k refer to page 273 gt ZX Check Control Display of stored Check Control messages refer to page 117 gt Gol Service required Display of service requirements refer to page 119 gt a Service Request Service request Head up Display Overview q The concept This system projects important information into the driver s field of vision e g the speed The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road Information Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head up Display refer to page 294 Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head up Display is influenced by the following factors gt Certain sitting positions gt Objects on the cover of the Head up Dis play Sunglasses with certain polarization filters Wet roads gt Unfavorable light conditions Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Displays Controls If the image is distorted have the basic set tings checked by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Switching on off About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings 3 Displays 4 Head Up Display 5 Head Up Display Display Overview The following information is displayed on the Head up Display gt Speed gt Navigation system gt Check Control messages gt Selection list in the instrument cluster gt Driver assistance systems Some of this i
246. l filler flap gt All doors tailgate and fuel filler flap In addition the following functions are exe cuted gt The settings saved in the profile refer to page 58 are applied gt The interior lights are being switched on unless they were manually switched off Switching the interior lights on and off manually refer to page 133 gt The welcome lamps are switched on if it is dark outside door handle lighting and the Welcome Light Carpet are also switched on These functions must be activated in the Settings refer to page 130 Press the remote control button again to switch on Welcome Light Carpet for the al ready unlocked vehicle gt The rear sliding visor is traveled into the position where it was prior to locking Anti theft protection is switched off gt The alarm system refer to page 69 is disarmed After opening the driver s door the vehicle is ready for operation refer to page 20 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Opening and closing Controls Convenient opening Press and hold this button on the re mote control after unlocking The windows and the glass sunroof are opened as long as the button on the remote control is pressed Locking WARNING For some country specific variants un locking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge If people must spend a longer time in the vehi cle while it is very hot or cold outside there is risk
247. layed Status control display Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display All wheels green System is active and will issue a warning rela tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset One to four wheels yellow A flat tire or major drop in tire inflation pressure in the indicated tires Wheels gray The system cannot detect a flat tire Reasons for this may be gt The system is being reset gt Malfunction Status information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures and de pending on the model tire temperatures It shows the actual values read they may vary depending on driving style or weather condi tions Carry out reset Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change Via iDrive and in the vehicle My Vehicle Vehicle status Tire Pressure Monitor reset Start the engine do not drive off oe SY SS Reset tire inflation pressure Perform reset 6 Drive away The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta tus Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor is dis played After driving faster than 19 mph 30 km h for a short period the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values The reset is completed automatically while driving After a successfully completed Reset the wheels on the
248. lays Adjusting the height About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Displays Head Up Display Height Turn the controller until the desired height is reached oS a YS 7 Press the controller The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Setting the rotation The screen of the Head up Display can be ro tated around its own axis About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Displays Head Up Display Rotation Pm R WN o Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected 7 Press the controller The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Special windshield The windshield is part of the system The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image A film in the windshield prevents double im ages from being displayed For this reason it is strongly suggested to have the special windshield replaced by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop 128 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Lights Controls Lights Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country prov
249. le phone the following functions must be acti vated prior to pairing About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Mobile devices Settings Ae i Select desired setting gt Office Activate functions to transmit short messages e mails calendars tasks notes and reminders to the vehicle Costs can be incurred by transmitting all data to the vehicle gt Contact images Activate function to show the contact pictures 6 Move the controller to the left Connecting the device via passkey entry Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear Control Display About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Mobile devices Connect new device a 2 p Select the functions for which the device is to be used gt Sy Telephone gt Ji Bluetooth audio gt C Apps The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played on the Control Display 6 Search for Bluetooth devices in the sur roundings of the device The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device display Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle 7 Enter and confirm the same passkey on the device and via iDrive or Compare the control number on the Con trol Display with the control number on the display of the device Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display 8 The device is connected and displayed in the device list There is a display of which features the mobile phone supports
250. le cur rently used Setting the time format About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Date and time Time format ea eS Select desired setting The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Instrument cluster with enhanced features setting the clock time display The clock time can be displayed in analog or digital form About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 General settings Ataglance a glance Displays Instrument panel Time ao p Select desired setting The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Automatic time setting Depending on your vehicle s optional features the time date and if needed the time zone are updated automatically About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings 3 Date and time 4 Automatic time setting The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Date Setting the date About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings 3 Date and time 4 Date 5 Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed D Press the controller 7 Make the necessary settings for the month and year The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Setting the date format About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Date and time Date format o E eS Select desired setting The setting i
251. le features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to The right place for children Information WARNING Unattended children or animals can move the vehicle and endanger themselves and traffic e g with the following actions Pressing the Start Stop button Releasing the parking brake Opening and closing of doors or windows Shifting the selector lever into neutral VV VV V V Using vehicle equipment There is risk of accidents or injuries Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve hicle Carry remote control along when exiting and lock the vehicle lt Children should always be in the rear WARNING Persons shorter than 5 ft 150 cm cannot correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable additional restraint systems The protective ef fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ad ditional injuries e g in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers There is risk of injuries or danger to life Secure persons shorter than 5 ft 150 cm using suita ble restraint systems lt Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety r
252. lides down gt 3 Fragrance cartridge arrow 1 corresponds to the first fragrance indicated on the Con trol Display 214 Fragrance cartridge arrow 2 corresponds to the second fragrance indicated on the Control Display 4 Pull the desired fragrance cartridge from the holder arrow Empty fragrance cartridges can taken to a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop for recycling If the fragrance cartridges are refilled with fra grance of a different brand the vehicle manu facturer will not assume warranty for possible effects of the fragrances on interior materials e g odor deposits color changes or possible system damages Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Interior equipment Controls Interior equipment Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Universal Integrated Remote Control The concept The universal garage door opener can operate up to 3 functions of remote controlled sys tems such as garage door drives or lighting systems The universal
253. lly in the following situations gt If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running gt While approaching detected obstacles if the speed is slower than approx 2 5 mph 4 km h The activation distance depends on the situation in question You may switch on and off automatic activation when obstacles are detected About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Parking 4 Automatic PDC activation only with re spective equipment 5 Automatic PDC activation The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Depending on equipment an appropriate cam era view is also switched on Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded Switch the system back on if needed 181 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driver assistance systems Switching on off manually 5 PDO Py Press button 6 Set the desired value The setting is stored for the drive profile cur gt On the LED lights up rently used gt Off the LED goes out The rearview camera image is displayed when the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the button Visual warning Display Signal tones When approaching an object an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object E g if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle a signal tone sounds from the left rear The
254. ly Pressing the switch again stops the motion See also Convenient opening refer to page 61 via remote control Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Opening and closing Controls Closing WARNING When operating the windows body parts and objects can be jammed There is risk of in juries or risk of property damage Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing lt gt P Pull the switch to the resistance point The window closes while the switch is held gt P Pull the switch beyond the resistance point The window closes automatically Pulling again stops the motion See also closing by means of Comfort Access refer to page 65 Pinch protection system WARNING When operating the windows body parts and objects can be jammed There is risk of in juries or risk of property damage Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing lt WARNING Accessories on the windows such as an tennas can impact jam protection There is risk of injuries Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows lt If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a window closes closing is interrupted The window reopens slightly Closing without the pinch protection system WARNING When operating the windows body parts and objects can be jammed There is risk of in juries or risk of proper
255. me the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi mum of 5 mph 10 km h The maximum speed that can be set de pends on the vehicle gt Pressing the rocker switch to the resist ance point and holding it accelerates or de celerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal After the rocker switch is released the ve hicle maintains its final soeed Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly Continuing cruise control Press button while the system is inter rupted The stored speed is reached and maintained Displays in the instrument cluster Desired speed Display in the speedometer gt Green marking system is active gt Marking is orange white the system has been paused gt Nomarking system is switched off Indicator lamp Indicator lamp green system is active Gray indicator lamp the system has been paused No indicator lamp system is switched off Status display 3 The selected desired speed is hidden 55 after a brief time If no speed is indicated it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not cur rently fulfilled Displays in the Head up Display Some system information can also be dis played in the Head up Display py The symbol is displayed on the Head up Display if the set desired speed is reached Steering a
256. ments symbolize the gained bo nus range in stages ECO PRO bonus range An adjusted driving style helps you extend your driving range N 35 5 This may be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument cluster The bonus range is shown in the range display The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled Efficiency display Display in the instrument cluster EE f g p 35 5 km n Display in the instrument cluster with ex panded scope A mark in the efficiency display informs about the current driving style Mark in the area of arrow 1 display of the en ergy recovered by coasting or when braking Mark in the area of arrow 2 display when ac celerating ECO PRO tip driving tip As soon as one of the conditions for efficient driving is no longer fulfilled respective driving instructions are displayed as a symbol in the instrument cluster The arrow indicates that the driving aw style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for instance The ECO PRO tip is not displayed anymore as soon as the conditions for efficient driving are fulfilled again ECO PRO tip symbols Symbol Measure N For an efficient driving style Give less gas decelerate in advance or reduce speed to selected ECO PRO speed Steptronic transmission shift from M S to D aa Indications on the Control Display Displaying Efficie
257. mote control being used at the time gt Ifthe profile is already assigned to a differ ent remote control this profile will apply to both remote controls It cannot be differen tiated anymore between the settings for the two remote controls Guest profile The guest profile is for individual settings that are stored in none of the three personal pro files This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Driver profiles 3 Just drive off guest 4 OK The guest profile cannot be renamed It is not assigned to the current remote control Rename profile A personal name can be assigned to the active profile to avoid confusion between the profiles About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Driver profiles 33 The profile marked with this symbol can be renamed Select profile Change driver profile name Enter profile name OK Select the symbol oo p Resetting the profile The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Driver profiles The profile marked with this symbol can be reset 3 Select profile 4 Reset driver profile 99 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Opening and closing Exporting profiles Most settings of the active profile can be ex ported This can be helpful for securing and ret
258. mputer i gt Current range arrow 1 123 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 gt Total range arrow 2 With a low remaining range a Check Control message Is briefly displayed With a dynamic driving style e g taking curves aggressively the engine function is not always ensured The Check Control message appears continu ously below a range of approx 30 miles 50 km CAUTION With a range of less than 30 miles 50 km it is possible that the engine will no longer have sufficient fuel Engine functions are no longer ensured There is risk of property damage Re fuel promptly lt Average speed and average fuel consumption General information Average speed and average fuel consumption are calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset in the onboard computer Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed Display V 9 60 mph 23 1 mpg gt Average speed arrow 1 gt Average consumption arrow 2 124 Resetting average values Press and hold PC button on blinker lever Time of arrival and distance to destination The concept The estimated time of arrival and the distance remaining to the destination are displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started A correctly adjusted clock is a prerequisite for a correct time of ar rival
259. n CAUTION The vehicle can be damaged when tow ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle There is risk of property damage The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform lt CAUTION When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts damage can occur on vehicle parts There is risk of property dam age Lift vehicle using suitable means lt CAUTION With transport on a loading platform do not fasten vehicle by the chassis Tow truck The vehicle should only be transported ona loading platform Towing other vehicles Information WARNING If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehicle s re sponse There is risk of an accident Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed CAUTION If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in correctly damage to other vehicle parts can occur There is risk of property damage Cor rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting gt Switch on the hazard warning system de pending on local regulations gt If the electrical system has failed clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win dow Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles 289 Online Edi
260. n is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on Above approx 130 mph 210 km h the braking intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure No automatic delay occurs The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac tively moving the steering wheel Object detection can be restricted Limitations of the detection range and functional restric tions are to be considered System limits Detection range The system s detection potential is limited Thus a system reaction might not come or might come late E g the following situations may not be de tected 143 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Safety gt Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed gt Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you or sharply decelerating vehicles Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance gt Two wheeled vehicles ahead of you Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations gt In heavy fog rain sprayed water or snow fall In tight curves gt If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated e g DSC OFF gt If the area of the front windshield in front of the interior mirror is dirty or covered gt Depending on equipment if the radar sen sor is dirty or obscured gt Upto 10 seconds after the start of the en gine via the Start Stop bu
261. n two steps gt Set departure times gt Activate departure times Setting departure time Via the iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Climate functions 3 Comfort ventilation or Comfort heating ventilation 4 Select the desired departure time 5 Set the departure time 6 Select day of the week if needed Via BMW display key 1 Switch on the display of the BMW display key Climate control setting S amp Tap symbol Select the desired departure time J If necessary tap day of the week Select time OK oof amp bh Activating the departure time If a departure time should influence the switch ing on of parked car heating ventilation the re spective departure time must be activated first Via the iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Climate functions 3 Comfort heating ventilation 4 For departure time Activate the desired departure time S The symbol on the automatic climate con trol signals an activated departure time Via BMW display key 1 Switch on the display of the BMW display key 2 Climate control setting 3 S amp Tap symbol 4 3 Tap symbol Activate the desired departure time Ambient air package The concept The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean and scent the interior air with high quality fra grances Two fragrances can be selected in the vehicle A variety other fragrances is possible by re placing the fragrance cartridges lonization is used
262. nctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replace ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop erly Always check the TPMS malfunction tell tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences be tween the individual wheels while driving In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes This will be detected and reported as a flat tire The system does not measure the actual infla tion pressure in the tires Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct other wise reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as sured Initialize the system after each correc tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Wheels and tires Mobility Status display The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed e g whether the RPA is active About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle status 3 1 Flat Tire Monitor The status is displayed Initialization When ini
263. nd lane guidance assistant including Traffic Jam Assist The concept The system assists the driver in keeping the vehicle within the lane For this purpose the system steers independently e g when driv ing in a curve Depending on the speed the system orients it self according to the lane markings or vehicles in front 177 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems General information The system determines the position of the lane markings and the vehicle driving ahead using five radar sensors and a camera Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether the steering wheel is being touched In order to be able to use the system place your hands around the steering wheel The system is deactivated if the steering wheel is no longer being touched Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation Based on the limits of the sys tem it cannot independently react to all traffic situations There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the re spective situations lt Overview Button the steering wheel Press but Function ton Mee Switch steering and lane guid 4H ance assistant including Traffic Jam Assist on off refer to page 179 Radar sensors The radar sensors are located in the bumpers
264. ne compartment can damage components and lead to a safety risk There is risk of accidents or risk of property damage WARNING The engine compartment accommo dates moving components Certain compo nents can move in the engine compartment with the vehicle switched off e g the cooler fan There is risk of injuries Do not reach into the area of moving parts Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts CAUTION Folded away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened There is risk of property damage Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood lt WARNING There are protruding parts e g lock hook on the inside of the hood There is risk of injuries If the hood is open pay attention to protruding parts and keep these areas clear WARNING An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility There is risk of an accident Stop immediately and correctly close the hood WARNING Body parts can be jammed on opening and closing the hood There is risk of injuries Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing 2172 Opening the hood 1 Pull lever arrow 1 Hood is unlocked p 2 After the lever is released pull the lever again arrow 2 Hood can be opened 3 Be careful of protruding parts on the hood Closing the hood Let the hood drop f
265. ne is started The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program When using the automatic climate control condensation water refer to page 236 devel ops that exits underneath the vehicle 204 Maximum cooling Press button The system is set to the lowest tem perature optimum air flow and air circulation mode Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re gion The vents need to be open for this The function is available with external temper atures beyond approx 32 F 0 C and with the engine running Adjust air flow on the driver s side with the pro gram active AUTO program Press button AUTO Air flow air distribution and tempera ture are controlled automatically Depending on the selected temperature AUTO intensity program and outside influen ces the air is directed to the windshield side windows upper body and into the footwell The cooling function refer to page 204 is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro gram At the same time a condensation sensor con trols the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible To switch off the program press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program activated the auto matic intensity control can be changed Sh SE sity Press the left or right side of the but ton decrease or increase the inten The sel
266. ned gt Tailgate and door s The trunk lid is opened and the doors are unlocked Confirmation signals from the vehicle About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Doors Key 4 Deactivate or activate the desired confir mation signals gt Flash for lock unlock 68 gt Acoustic signal for lock unlock Automatic locking About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Doors Key 4 Select desired setting gt Lock automatically The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if no door is opened gt Lock after starting to drive The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off Automatic unlocking About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Doors Key 4 Unlock at end of trip After drive readiness is ended by pressing the Start Stop button the locked vehicle is automatically unlocked Retrieving the seat mirror and steering wheel settings On unlocking of the vehicle the positions for the driver s seat exterior mirror and steering wheel stored in the profile are automatically re trieved WARNING There is risk of jamming when moving the seats There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad justment lt Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Opening and closing Controls About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Driv
267. nese or iron Do not press the Start Stop button after refuel ing the wrong fuel Contact a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or re pair shop lt Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 i e E10 or E25 may be used for refuel ing Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards US ASTM 4806 xx CAN CGSB 3 511 xx xx comply with the current standard in each case CAUTION Wrong fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine There is risk of property dam age Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol percentage than recommended or one with other types of alcohol e g M5 to M100 lt Recommended fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 91 Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89 CAUTION Fuel that does not comply with the mini mum quality can compromise engine function or cause engine damage There is risk of prop Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Fuel Mobility erty damage Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat ing the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures This has no effect on the engine life CAUTION The use of poor quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage Addi tionally problems relating to drivability start ing and stalling especially under certain envi ronmental conditions such as high ambi
268. ness refer to page 19 is switched back on Drive readiness Information DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila tion is insufficient harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle The exhaust gases con tain carbon monoxide an odorless and color less but highly toxic gas In enclosed areas ex haust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle There is danger to life Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila tion WARNING An unsecured vehicle can put itself into motion and roll away There is risk of an acci dent Before exiting secure the vehicle against rolling In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away observe the following gt Set the parking brake gt On uphill grades or on a slope turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb gt On uphill grades or on a slope also secure the vehicle e g with a wheel chock lt CAUTION In the case of repeated starting attempts or repeated starting in quick succession the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned The catalytic converter can overheat There is risk of property damage Avoid repeated start ing in quick succession lt Switching on drive readiness Steptronic transmission 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Press the Start Stop button The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the en gine starts Most of the indicator and warning
269. nformation is only displayed briefly as needed Selecting displays in the Head up Display About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Displays Head Up Display aS Se gt Select desired setting The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used View Three different views are available for the Head up Display About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Displays Head Up Display PPPA Select desired setting gt STANDARD all displays in the Head up Display are active gt REDUCED the displays in the Head up Display are reduced to the absolute necessary gt INDIVIDUAL all displays in the Head up Display are active Individual dis plays e g Check Control messages can be individually configured The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness The basic setting can be adjusted manually About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Displays Head Up Display Brightness ao fe pr Turn the controller until the desired bright ness is set 7 Press the controller When the low beams are activated the bright ness of the Head up Display can be addition ally influenced using the instrument lighting The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used 127 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Disp
270. ng The concept Displays a speed when reached should cause a warning to be issued The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed once by at least 3 mph 5 km h Displaying setting or changing the speed warning About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Speed warning 4 Warning at 5 Turn the controller until the desired speed is displayed 6 Press the controller Speed warning is stored 125 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Displays Activating deactivating the speed warning About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Speed warning Speed warning te YS Ye Press the controller Setting your current speed as the speed warning About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Speed warning Select current speed a aS NS Press the controller The current vehicle speed is stored as the speed warning Vehicle status The concept The status can be displayed and actions per formed for several systems Opening the vehicle status About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle status Information at a glance gt 1 Flat Tire Monitor Status of the Flat Tire Monitor refer to page 269 gt 1 Tire Pressure Monitor Status of the Tire Pressure Monitor refer to page 265 gt Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor refer to page 265 126 gt QZ Engine oil level Electronic engine oil level chec
271. ng duration amounts to 2 minutes Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is used the vehicle may roll back slightly DSC Dynamic Stability Control The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the power wheels when driving off and accelerating DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi tions such as fishtailing or nose diving Within the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi cle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels Information Adapt your driving style to the situation for an appropriate driving style is always the respon sibility of the driver The laws of physics cannot be repealed not even with DSC Therefore do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner 163 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driving stability control systems WARNING When driving with roof load e g with roof mounted luggage rack driving safety may not be ensured in driving critical situations due to the elevated center of gravity There is risk of accidents or risk of property damage Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when driving with roof load lt Overview Button in the vehicle DSC OFF or Indicator warning lights The indicator lamp flashes DSC con o gt trols the drive and braking forces The indicator lamp lights up DSC has failed Deactivating activating DSC
272. ng the trunk lid refer to page 65 54 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Opening and closing Controls Replacing the battery 1 Remove integrated key from remote con trol 2 Raise the cover of the battery compart ment arrow 1 3 Remove the cover of the battery compart ment arrow 2 4 Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing up 5 Press the cover closed Ky Take old battery to a collection point a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop New remote controls New remote controls are available from a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Loss of the remote controls The lost remote control can be blocked by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop Emergency detection of remote control Engine readiness can also be activated in the following situations gt Interference of radio transmission to re mote control by external sources e g by radio masts gt Empty battery in remote control gt Interference from radio transmissions through mobile devices in close proximity to remote control gt Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo bile devices in the vehicle A Check Control message is displayed when an attempt is made to start the engine or acti vate engine readiness Activation of dri
273. ng wheel gt Shift up briefly pull right shift paddle gt Shift down briefly pull left shift paddle gt With the respective transmission version the lowest possible gear can be selected by pulling and holding the left shift paddle Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds for example downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in strument cluster followed by the current gear If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode If the selector lever is still in selector lever po sition D with the respective transmission ver sion it is possible to switch back into the auto matic mode gt Pull and hold right shift paddle or gt In addition to the briefly pulled right shift paddle briefly pull the left shift paddle In the manual mode after conservative driving for a certain amount of time or if there has been no acceleration or shifting of the shift paddles within a certain amount of time the transmission switches back to automatic mode Displays in the instrument cluster The selector lever position is displayed e g P Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock General information Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from the danger area Unlocking is possible if the started can spin
274. ng with remote control unlocking with remote con trol 60 Operating concept iDrive 21 Operating readiness 19 Operating via iDrive 22 Operating with the control ler 22 Operation via touchscreen 25 Optional equipment standard equipment 7 Outside air see AUC 205 Overheating of engine see Coolant temperature 118 Own Safety 7 P Paint vehicle 292 Pairing device 41 Pairing mobile phone 41 Pairing smartphone 41 Pairing telephone 41 Panorama View see Sur round View 187 Panoramic glass sunroof 73 Parallel parking assistant 193 Park Distance Control PDC 180 Parked vehicle condensa tion 236 Parking aid see PDC 180 Parking assistant 193 Parking brake 100 Parking lights 129 Parking with Automatic Hold 100 Parts and accessories 7 Passenger side mirror tilting downward 85 PDC Park Distance Con trol 180 Pedestrian detection see Night Vision 147 Pedestrian warning with City braking function 144 Personal profile see pro files 58 Pillows 84 Pinch protection system glass sunroof 75 Pinch protection system win dows 71 Plastic care 293 Post Crash iBrake 161 Power failure 285 Power sunroof glass 73 Power windows 70 Prescribed engine oil types 275 Pressure tire air pres sure 254 Pressure warning FTM tires 268 Profiles 58 Profiles see profiles 58 Programmable memory but tons iDrive 28 Protective function glass sunroof 75 Protective function win dows 71 Pus
275. ning The concept Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle At blind driveways or when driving out of diag onal parking spaces approaching cross traffic is earlier detected by the system than possible from the driver s seat The system indicates approaching traffic The lamp in the exterior mirror lights up a sig nal tone may sound and the respective indica tor is called up on the Control Display With the respective equipment variant the traffic area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well Two additional radar sensors are lo cated in the front bumpers 197 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driver assistance systems Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess visi bility and traffic situation There is risk of an ac cident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations SS S _S SS SSS With the respective equipment variant there Overview are two additional radar sensors in the front l l bumper Button in the vehicle Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra dar sensors clean and unobstructed Switching on off Activating deactivating the system Py 1 MY Press button 2 Move the controller to the left Parking assistance systems 3 lt lt Settings PY W 1 4 Cross
276. nitialize the system refer to page 75 Disposing of old batteries Oy Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport Fuses Information WARNING Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components There is risk of fire Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rat ing lt In the trunk Remove the cover on the right side trim arrow ae lt lt 7 Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet 285 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Breakdown assistance Breakdown assistance Vehicle features and options Overview This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the g series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and Ly systems The respectively applicable country s provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems i SOS button in the roofliner Hazard warning flashers Req
277. njuries When low ering the vehicle make sure that the areas of movement under the vehicle and under the wheel housing are free lt 200 Overview Button in the vehicle Level adjustment Adjusting the level manually Press button In the low speed range the vehicle is raised to the raised level with a press of the button Starting at a speed of approx 20 mph 35 km h the vehicle lower itself automatically to the normal level Display gt LED off normal level gt LED flashes level is being adjusted gt LED lit raised level gt LED flashes fast level adjustment not pos sible System limits With several manual level changes one after another the system will switch itself off if nec essary The fast flashing LED on the button in dicates that the system is temporarily unavaila ble Tire change Before a tire change deactivate the system Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving comfort Controls B Press button and hold for approx 7 sec WH onds then release The LED flashes fast Activate system The system is activated again automatically when you drive away Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed The system is disrupted Vehicle handling may be altered and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced Have checked by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or re pair shop Long periods when vehicle is parked
278. noticed on the 158 steering wheel and can be manually overridden at any time System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations gt When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own In heavy fog rain or snowfall In tight curves or on narrow lanes If the bumpers are dirty or iced up or cov ered with stickers gt Inthe event of missing worn poorly visi ble merging diverging or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas gt When lane markings are covered in snow ice dirt or water gt When the lane markings are covered by objects gt When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you gt If there are constant blinding effects be cause of oncoming light e g from the sun low in the sky gt When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over dirty or cov ered with stickers etc gt During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle delivery A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is gov erned by the following FCC ID gt NBGOO9014A Compliance statement Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Controls This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to t
279. ns General information The system offers several different damping settings These are assigned to the different driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Control refer to page 110 Tuning Drive mode Damper tuning COMFORT COMFORT comfortable PLUS SPORT firm Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Climate control Controls Climate control Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Automatic climate control Overview Switch in the center console Press but Function ton Temperature refer to page 204 AIC Climate control operation refer to page 204 Maximum cooling refer to page 204 AUTO program refer to page 204 Press but Function ton En Recirculated air mode refer to page 205 Air flow manual refer to page 205 m Air distribution manual refer to page 205 SYNC program refer to page 206 2 IN gZ Yeo Defrost and defog window re fer to page 206 Rear window defroster refer to page 206 Active seat ventilation refer to page 92 Seat heatin
280. nt prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region In such case please contact Customer Relations for further information Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Specifications for required maintenance meas ures gt BMW Maintenance system gt Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models gt Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications this could result in seri ous damage to the vehicle Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty Data memory Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that tempo rarily or permanently store technical informa tion about the condition of the vehicle events and faults This technical information generally records the state of a component a module a system or the environment Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Information Po gt Operating mode of system components fill levels for instance gt Status messages for the vehicle and from its individual components e g wheel rota tion speed vehicle speed deceleration transverse acceleration gt Malfunctions and faults in important sys tem componen
281. ntDynamics info The current efficiency of the ECO PRO sys tems can be shown on the Control Display 1 My Vehicle 2 Technology in action 3 EfficientDynamics The following systems are displayed gt Auto Start Stop function gt Energy recovery gt Coasting 243 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving tips Pkg Saving fuel Displaying fuel consumption history The average consumption on the route coasted as well as the duration for which the auto start stop function switched off the en gine can be displayed 1 My Vehicle 2 Technology in action 3 EfficientDynamics Vertical bars show consumption for the se lected route Selecting route length 1 orron Press button 2 Select desired route length or scaling Resetting fuel consumption history 1 orron Press button 2 Reset consumption history Route ahead assistant The concept The system helps to conserve fuel and pro motes a proactively driving style It can detect certain upcoming sections of the journey based on the navigation data and alert the driver to them in good time The detected route sections such as built up areas or changes of road require the driver to reduce speed General information This alert is issued even if the upcoming route section cannot yet be detected while driving The alert is displayed until the route section is reached If an alert is received the vehicle s sp
282. nth and before a long trip lt Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the trunk regularly and correct it as needed Tires have a natural consistent loss of tire in flation pressure Tires heat up while driving and the tire infla tion pressure increases along with the tire s temperature The tire inflation pressure speci fications relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient temperature 254 Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold This means after driving no more than 1 25 miles 2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours The displays of inflation devices may under read by up to 0 1 bar 2 psi For Flat Tire Monitor after correcting the tire inflation pressure reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor For Tire Pressure Monitor after correcting the tire inflation pressure reset the Tire Pressure Monitor Tire inflation pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table refer to page 255 contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature The tire inflation pres sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type To identify the correct tire inflation pressure please note the following gt Tire sizes of your vehicle gt Maximum permitted driving speed Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph 160 km h For speeds of up to
283. nts Left side storage compartment Ses Pull the handle Lashing eyes in the cargo area To secure the cargo refer to page 238 there are lashing eyes in the cargo area Storage compartment below cargo floor panel There is a storage compartment under the cargo floor panel Fold up the cargo floor panel Information Provided by A FN Le Ca f 230 _ Qa Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Storage compartments Controls Information Provided by 7 Geran 231 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving tips This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes Driving tips eka Things to remember when driving Things to remember when driving Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Breaking in period General information Moving parts need time to adjust to one an other break in time The following instructions will help accomplish a long vehicle life and good efficiency During break in do no
284. nually 195 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems gt The parking procedure is ac tive Steering control has been taken over by system iS gt Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight even if the system Is de activated When the system is deactivated the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray Parking using the parking assistant 1 A Press the button or shift into reverse to switch on the parking assistant Activate parking assistant if necessary P amp The parking assistant is activated 2 Drive by the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx 22 mph 35 km h and at a distance of maximum 5 ft 1 5 m The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the Control Display 3 Follow the instructions on the Control Dis play Hold down the parking assistant button for the duration of the parking procedure At the end of the parking procedure the P se lector lever position is set The end of the parking procedure is indi cated on the Control Display 4 Adjust the parking position yourself if needed Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time gt amp Parking Assistant Select the symbol on the Control Display gt Release button during the parking procedure 196 Interrupting automatically The syst
285. nworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size 3 Check tire inflation pressure at the next op portunity and correct as needed 4 Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor 284 Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor 5 Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench 6 Replace the damaged tires as soon as pos sible Driving with emergency wheel WARNING The emergency wheel has particular di mensions When driving with an emergency wheel changed driving properties may occur at higher speeds e g reduced lane stability when braking longer braking distance and changed self steering properties in the limit area There is risk of an accident Drive moder ately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance free The added amount of acid is sufficient for the service life of the battery More information about the battery can be re quested from a dealer s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop Battery replacement CAUTION Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi cle functions There is risk of property damage Information on the compatible vehicle batteries is available at your dealer s service center lt After a battery replacement the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle battery be registered on
286. o close it The cover slides down Center armrest Press button arrow 1 and fold the cover up arrow 2 Front J Overview LA A storage compartment is located in the center i armrest between the seats j Opening Press button arrow 1 and fold the cover up arrow 2 Press button 227 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Storage compartments 2 Twocupholders are located in the center console Press button Closing Press cover down until it engages Cupholders Information WARNING Unsuitable containers in the cup holder and hot beverages can damage the cup holder and increase the risk of injuries in the event of an accident There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage Use light weight unbreaka ble and sealable containers Do not transport hot beverages Do not force objects into the cup holder Front Opening 1 Push the cover forward until it engages be hind the cup holders 228 Rear Information CAUTION With an open cup holder the center arm rest cannot be folded back up There is risk of property damage Press back the covers be fore the center armrest is folded up Opening If not equipped with rear console Press button to open Slide cup holders rearward to close If equipped with rear console Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Storage compartments Controls Slide cover rearward to open
287. o page 225 gt Glove compartment on the driver s side refer to page 226 gt Compartments in the doors refer to page 226 gt Storage compartment on the center con sole refer to page 226 gt Center armrest refer to page 227 gt Storage compartment in the rear refer to page 227 gt Storage compartment in the rear center console refer to page 226 gt Pockets on the backrests of the front seats Glove compartment Front passenger side Information WARNING Folded open the glove compartment protrudes in the car s interior Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car s interior while driving e g in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive ma neuvers There is risk of injuries Always close the glove compartment immediately after us ing It lt Opening Pull the handle The light in the glove compartment switches on Closing Fold cover closed 225 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Storage compartments Locking The glove compartment can be locked with an integrated key This prevents access to the glove compartment After the glove compartment is locked the re mote control can be handed over such as ata hotel without the integrated key Driver s side Information WARNING Folded open the glove compartment protrudes in the car s interior Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car s interior while
288. o page 294 gt When using high pressure washers do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm gt Do not put stickers over sensors Requirements For measuring parking spaces gt Maximum speed while driving forward ap prox 22 mph 35 km h gt Maximum distance to row of parked vehi cles 5 ft 1 5 m Suitable parking space General information gt Gap behind an object that has a min length of 1 7 ft 0 5 m gt Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx 1 7 ft 0 5 m Parallel parking to the road gt Min length of gap between two objects your vehicle s length plus approx 2 6 ft 0 8 m gt Minimum depth approx 5 ft 1 5 m Diagonal parking Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Controls gt Width of gap between two objects your vehicle s width plus approx 2 3 ft 0 7 m up to maximum 16 ft 5 m gt Minimum depth your vehicle s length The depth of diagonal parking spaces must be estimated by the driver Dur to technical limitations the system can approximate the depth of diagonal parking spaces only Regarding the parking procedure gt Doors and trunk lid closed gt Parking brake released gt Driver s safety belt fastened Switching on off Switching on with the button Py Press button The LED lights up The current status of the parking space search is indicated on t
289. obile phone prior to pairing Start new device search gt Is the mobile phone in power save mode or does it have only a limited remaining bat tery life Charge the mobile phone in the snap in adapter wireless charging storage or via the charging cable gt Depending on the mobile phone it is pos sible that only one mobile phone can be connected to the vehicle Unpair the con nected mobile phone from the vehicle and pair and connect only one mobile phone The mobile phone no longer reacts gt Switch the mobile phone off and on again gt Ambient temperatures too high or too low Do not subject the mobile phone to ex treme ambient temperatures The telephone functions are not available gt Configure the mobile phone and connect it with the telephone or auxiliary phone func tion No or not all phone book entries are displayed or they are incomplete gt Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete gt Itis possible that only the phone book en tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted gt It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters gt The number of phone book entries to be stored Is too high gt Is the data volume of the contact too large e g due to stored information such as notes Reduce the data volume of the con tact gt Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source Configure the mobile phone and 48 connect it
290. ock 62 Door lock see Remote con trol 54 Doors Automatic Soft Clos ing 63 Downhill control 165 Drive mode 110 Drive off assistant 163 Drive off assistant see DSC 163 Drive readiness see starting the engine 97 Driving Dynamics Con trol 110 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Driving instructions break in 234 Driving notes general 234 Driving stability control sys tems 163 Driving style analysis 246 Driving tips 234 DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol 163 DTC Dynamic Traction Con trol 164 Dynamic Damping Con trol 201 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 163 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 164 E ECO PRO 241 ECO PRO bonus range 243 ECO PRO display 241 ECO PRO drive mode see Driving Dynamics Con trol 110 ECO PRO driving mode 241 ECO PRO driving style analy sis 246 ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL drive mode see Driving Dynamics Control 110 ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL see Driving Dynamics Con trol 110 ECO PRO mode 241 ECO PRO route ahead assis tant 244 ECO PRO see Driving Dy namics Control 110 ECO PRO Tip driving in struction 243 Electronic oil measure ment 273 Electronic Stability Program ESP see DSC 163 Emergency detection remote control 55 Emergency release fuel filler flap 250 Emergency Request 286 Emergency start function en gine start 55 Emergency unlocking trans mission lock 106 Emergency unlocking trunk lid
291. ock the vehicle For activation of drive readiness 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Press the Start Stop button When the Start Stop button is pressed without stepping on the brake a Check Control mes sage is displayed Selector lever position Selector lever position P is automatically en gaged after approx 25 minutes Headlights gt Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleansers gt Soak areas that have been dirtied e g from insects with shampoo and wash off with water gt Thaw ice with de icing spray do not use an ice scraper After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle apply the brakes briefly to dry them otherwise braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur Completely remove all residues on the win dows to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear 292 Vehicle care Car care products The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends using car care and cleaning products from BMW WARNING Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health There is risk of injuries When cleaning the in terior open the doors or windows Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles Fol low the instructions on the container lt Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollut
292. of injuries or danger to life Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it lt The driver s door must be closed gt All doors the tailgate and the fuel filler flap are locked Press button on the remote control gt The rear sliding visor is being closed Anti theft protection is switched on It pre vents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or the door opener gt The alarm system refer to page 69 is armed Switching on exterior lighting A Press button on the remote control with the vehicle locked gt The interior lights are being switched on unless they were manually switched off Switching the interior lights on and off manually refer to page 133 gt Inthe dark door handle lighting and Wel come Light Carpet are switched on if these functions were activated For Settings re fer to page 67 If the button is pressed again within 10 sec onds after vehicle was locked the interior mo tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti theft warning system refer to page 70 are turned off After locking wait 10 seconds be fore pressing the button again Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation Press button on the remote control and hold for at least 3 seconds D To switch off the alarm press any button Opening the tailgate CAUTION During opening the trunk lid pivots back an
293. ofiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions Avoid rubbing the material vigorously CAUTION Open Velcro fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers There is risk of property damage Ensure that any Vel cro fasteners are closed Caring for special components Light alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9 Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 F 60 C Follow the manufac turer s instructions Aggressive acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components such as the brake disk Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radia tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water possibly with shampoo added partic ularly when they have been exposed to road Salt Rubber components Environmental influences can cause surface soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss For cleaning use only water and suitable care products the manufacturer of your vehicle rec ommends original BMW care products Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care agents at regular intervals When cleaning rubber seals do not use any silicon containing car care products in order to avoid damage or noises Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag T
294. omatic climate control Overview Temperature AUTO program Air distribution manual Air flow AUTO intensity Display Maximum cooling Seat heating 91 Active seat ventilation 92 CON OO FR WN 207 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Climate control Switch on off via iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Climate functions 4 Rear climate The rear automatic climate control is not ready for operation if the automatic climate control is switched off or if the function for defrosting or defogging the windows is active defrost win dows and remove condensation Switch on off via button Switching on Press any button except gt Left side of Air volume button gt Seat heating gt Seat ventilation Switch off P d hold the left button sa amp ress an u AUTO program AUTO Press button Air flow air distribution and tempera ture are controlled automatically Depending on the selected temperature the AUTO intensity and outside influences the air is directed to the upper body and into the foot well The cooling function is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program activated the auto matic intensity control can be changed a amp Press the left or right side of the but ton decrease or increase the inten sity 208 The selected intensity is shown on the display
295. on Tires General information Tires can affect fuel consumption in various ways e g tire size may influence fuel con sumption Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and if needed correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary Start driving right away but at moderate engine speeds This is the quickest way of warming the cold engine up to operating temperature Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi cle driving ahead of you Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Saving fuel a ee tips Avoid high engine speeds As a rule driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear If necessary observe the gear shift indicator refer to page 120 of the vehicle Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt For going downhill take your foot off the accel erator and let the vehicle roll The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch
296. on potential after a break in time Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles 300 km Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires WARNING Retreated tires can have different tire casing structures With advanced age the serv ice life can be limited There is risk of an acci dent Do not use retreated tires lt Winter tires Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads Although so called all season M S tires pro vide better winter traction than summer tires they do not provide the same level of perform ance as winter tires Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires then a respective symbol is displayed in your field of vision The plate is available from a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop With mounted winter tires observe and adhere to the permissible maximum speed Run flat tires If you are already using run flat tires for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire A dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop will be glad to answer additional questions at any time 259 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Wheels and tires Rotating wheels between axles Different wea
297. ond the resistance point The turn signal lever returns into is starting po sition after actuation To switch off manually slightly tap the lever to the resistance point Triple turn signal activation Slightly tap lever The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Lighting Exterior lighting One touch turn signal oo S amp S Select desired setting The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash High beams headlight flasher gt High beams arrow 1 gt High beams off headlight flasher arrow 2 Washer wiper system Switching the wipers on off and brief wipe General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly Information CAUTION If the wipers are frozen to the windshield the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor overheat on switching on There is risk of property damage Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on lt 103 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driving Switching on The rain sensor automatically controls the time a between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall The sensor is located on the wind shield directly behind
298. ons Emissions gt The warning lamp lights up Emissions are deteriorating Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible gt The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances This indicates that there is excessive mis firing in the engine Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately otherwise serious engine misfiring within a brief pe riod can seriously damage emission con 280 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Replacing components Mobility Replacing components Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Onboard vehicle tool kit The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the left storage compartment of the cargo area Wiper blade replacement Information CAUTION If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield without the wiper blades installed the wind shield can be damaged There is risk of prop erty damage Secure the wiper arm when re placing the wiper blades and do not fold down the wipers without the wiper blades installed CAUTION Folded away wipers can be
299. operty damage Have work under the hood be executed by a dealer s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop 106 Washer fluid reservoir All washer nozzles are supplied from one res ervoir in the engine compartment Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con centrate and tap water and if required with a washer antifreeze according to the manufac turer s recommendations Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the right mixture Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water this could damage the wiper system Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif ferent manufacturers because they can clog the windshield washer nozzles Recommended minimum fill quantity 0 2 US gal 1 liter Steptronic transmission Information WARNING An unsecured vehicle can put itself into motion and roll away There is risk of an acci dent Before exiting secure the vehicle against rolling In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away observe the following gt Set the parking brake gt On uphill grades or on a slope turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving Controls gt On uphill grades or on a slope also secure the vehicle e g with a wheel chock Selector lever positions D Drive Selector lever position for normal vehi
300. or alleged recognized foot movement The sensor range reaches approx 5 ft 1 50 m behind the area at the rear of the car WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat ing the tailgate There is risk of injuries Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing lt CAUTION During opening the trunk lid pivots back and up There is risk of property damage Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing Foot movement to be carried out 1 Place in the center behind the vehicle about an arm s length from the vehicle rear 2 Move a foot in the direction of travel as far under the vehicle as possible and immedi ately pull it back With this movement the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors E The trunk lid opens regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked Before the opening the hazard warning sys tem flashes To close the tailgate repeat the foot move ment Before closing the hazard warning system flashes and an acoustic signal sounds The closing of the trunk lid has no effect on the locking of the vehicle To avoid locking it into the vehicle do not place the remote control in the cargo area Another foot movement can interrupt the clos Ing Operation Malfunction Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol lowing circumstances
301. or area Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats Make sure that there is sufficient clear ance for the pedals Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re moved e g for cleaning lt 235 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving tips Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet salted or in heavy rain press brake pedal ever so gently every few miles Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it Hills WARNING Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure There is risk of an accident Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system lt WARNING In idle or with the engine switched off safety relevant functions are restricted or not available anymore e g braking effect of the engine or braking force and steering support There is risk of an accident Do not drive in idle or with the engine switched off lt Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking efforts Other wise the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency You can increase the engine s braking effect by shiftin
302. or outgoing call Missed call Wireless network reception strength Symbol flashes network search Wireless network is not available Roaming is active Text message was received Message received Reminder Sending not possible Contacts are imported Entertainment symbols Symbol Meaning A gr CD DVD player Music collection AUX IN port AUX IN port in the front or in the rear Bluetooth audio USB audio interface Mobile phone audio interface Online Entertainment WLAN iPod Additional symbols Symbol Meaning A Check Control message Of Spoken instructions are turned off 2 gt Request of the current vehicle posi tion Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly e g radio stations navigation destina tions phone numbers and menu entries Settings are stored for the profile currently used Saving a function 1 Select function via iDrive 2 Press and hold the desired button until a signal sounds Running a function Press button The function will work immediately This means e g that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected Displaying the button assignment Touch buttons with bare fingers Do not wear gloves or use objects The key assignment is displayed at top edge of screen Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI
303. overs gt Donothang objects e g clothes hangers directly on the head restraint gt Only use accessories that have been de termined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint gt Do not use any accessories e g pillows while driving Correctly adjusted head restraint General information A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head 82 Active head restraint In the event of a rear end collision with a cer tain severity the active head restraint automat ically reduces the distance from the head Wear and tear after accidents or when dam aged otherwise Have the active head restraint checked and if needed replaced Adjusting the height Adjusting electrically Distance to back of head manual head restraints EE gt Forward by pulling gt Back press the button and push the head restraint toward the rear Distance to back of head electrical head restraints The head restraint is automatically reposi tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Adjusting Controls Adjusting the side extensions a Fold forward for increased lateral support in the rest
304. ow starting Steptronic transmission Do not tow start the vehicle Tow starting the engine is not possible due to the transmission Have the cause of the starting problems fixed Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Care Mobility Care Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Car washes General information Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised Wash your vehicle frequently particularly in winter Intense soiling and road salt can dam age the vehicle Steam blaster and high pressure washer Information CAUTION When cleaning with high pressure wash ers components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high There is risk of property damage Maintain suf ficient distance and do not spray too long con tinuously Follow the user s manual for the high pressure washer Distances and temperature gt Maximum temperature 140 F 60 C gt Minimum distance from sensors cameras seals 12 in 30 cm gt M
305. own into the car s interior and injure occu pants There is risk of injuries Close the cooler after use when driving Opening the rear cooler 1 Fold down the center armrest 2 Opening the through loading system refer to page 222 3 Press the opener and fold the cover for ward 223 Controls Interior equipment Switching on 2 Pullon the rear handle and push the cooler The cooler can be operated at two levels into the guide rails 1 Turn on operations 2 Press button once for each cooling level The highest cooling power is active when two LEDs are lit If the cooler was switched on the last time op erating readiness was switched off it will like wise be switched on the next time operating readiness is switched on 3 Fold the handle back again Malfunction The cooler cannot be switched on or switches off e g when the cooling system overheats or if the battery voltage is low One of the LEDs Switch off Press button repeatedly until the LEDs go out Removing flashes 1 Pull on the rear handle 2 Pull cooler backward and remove it Remedy the problem 1 If necessary allow the refrigerator cooling system to cool down 2 Start the engine 3 Switch on cooler If the LED flashes even after a short time have the cooler checked by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop 3 Fold the cover back Ski and snowboard bag
306. own on the Control Display Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi tions Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively interfere in the respective situations lt Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Controls Overview Switching on off manually i P button Button in the vehicle ress button gt On the LED lights up gt Off the LED goes out The PDC is shown on the Control Display The rearview camera image is displayed when the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the button Switching the view via iDrive Rearview camera With PDC activated eR Rear view camera The rearview camera image is displayed Camera Display on the Control Display QO Functional requirement gt The rearview camera is switched on 4 T a gt The trunk lid is fully closed Assistance functions Activate deactivate assistance The camera lens is located in the handle of the functions tailgate More than one assistance function can be ac The image quality may be impaired by dirt tive at the same time Clean the camera lens refer to page 294 gt PY Parking aid lines ee Pathway lines and turning radius lines are Switching on off displayed refer to page 186 ee gt PA Obstacle marking Switching on a
307. ows Shifting the selector lever into neutral VV VV OV Using vehicle equipment There is risk of accidents or injuries Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve hicle Carry remote control along when exiting and lock the vehicle lt Idle state automatic The idle state is automatically established gt After several minutes if no operation takes place on the vehicle gt Ifthe charging state of the vehicle batteries is low gt If one of the front doors is opened de pending on the setting via iDrive The idle state is not automatically established while a phone call is active Establishing idle state when opening the front doors About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Doors Key 4 Turn off after door opening 19 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance CEIC Idle state operating and drive readiness Idle state manual Establish idle state in the vehicle after trip end TIT be gona en lea Ime TTS T io we i imi ra i j a A f p Hold button down until the OFF indicator on the instrument clus ter goes out Operating readiness The concept When operating readiness is switched on most functions can be used while the vehicle is stationary Desired settings can be adjusted General information The vehicle is in operating readiness state af ter opening via the front doors Display OFF is displayed in the instru men
308. peed warning An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed gt Tip at Activating ECO PRO functions Adjust which ECO PRO functions should be used gt Coasting 242 gt ECO PRO seat climate control gt ECO PRO climate control gt ECO PRO sight gt Route ahead assistant Coasting Fuel efficiency can be optimized by disengag ing the engine and Coasting with the engine idling ECO PRO seat heating The output of seat heating and possibly seat ventilation is reduced on activation of ECO PRO ECO PRO climate control ECO PRO climate control Climate control is set to be fuel efficient By making a slight change to the set tempera ture or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car s interior fuel consumption can be economized The mirror heating is made available when out side temperatures are very cold Route ahead assistant The route ahead assistant detects and indi cates route sections ahead of the vehicle Resetting the settings Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard settings Select and confirm Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD Display in the instrument cluster Display When ECO PRO mode is activated the display switches to a special configuration Some of the displays may differ from the dis play in the instrument cluster Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Blue bar seg
309. placement tail lamps 282 Bulbs and lights 282 Button Start Stop 97 Bypassing see Jump start Ing 287 C California Proposition 65 Warning 8 Calling up mirror adjust ment 68 Calling up seat adjust ment 68 Calling up steering wheel ad justment 68 Camera based damping ad justment 201 Camera lenses care 294 Camera rearview camera without Surround View 184 Camera see Surround View 187 Can holder see Cu pholder 228 Captain s chair 89 Car battery 284 Car care products 292 Care displays 294 Care vehicle 292 Cargo 237 Cargo area storage compart ments 229 Cargo securing 238 Cargo straps securing cargo 238 Car key see Remote con trol 54 Carpet care 294 Cartridge replacement see Ambient air package 211 Car wash 291 Catalytic converter see Hot exhaust system 235 CBS Condition Based Serv ice 279 Center armrest 227 Center console 16 Central locking system 63 Central screen see Control Display 21 Changes technical see Own Safety 7 Changing parts 281 Changing wheels 282 Changing wheels tires 258 Chassis number see vehicle identification number 10 Check Control 114 Checking the engine oil level electronically 273 Checking the oil level elec tronically 273 Children seating position 93 Children transporting safely 93 Child restraint fixing sys tem 93 Child restraint fixing system LATCH 95 Child restraint fixing systems mounting 94 Child safety
310. played when the low beams are activated A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a fraction of a second Pedestrian and animal detection Object detection and warning only functions in darkness Objects whose form is similar to people with sufficient heat radiation are detected In addition the system also detects animals above a certain minimum size e g deer Display on the Control Display with heat image activated gt People detected by the system in light yellow gt Animals detected by the system in dark yellow Range of object detection with good ambient conditions gt Pedestrian detection up to approx 330 ft 100 m gt Detection of large animals up to approx 490 ft 150 m gt Detection of medium animals up to ap prox 230 ft 70 m Environmental influences can limit the availa bility of object detection If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is located in a residential area the animal detec tion is temporarily switched off 147 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Safety Information Camera WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess visi bility and traffic situation There is risk of an ac cident Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations lt Overview The camera is automatically heate
311. pper body re gion The vents need to be open for this Air is cooled as quickly as possible gt At an external temperature of approx 32 F 0 C gt When the engine is running Operation is also possible using BMW Touch Command Climate control operation on the roofliner Temperature Turn the ring to set the desired C temperature Air flow Press the left or right side of the but en QA g i MIRGA ton decrease or increase air flow LEDs indicate the intensity of the air supply The air flow may be reduced automatically to save battery power Ventilation Thumbwheel for changing the air flow direc tion Parked car ventilation heating The concept The parked car ventilation ventilates the vehi cle interior and lowers its temperature if needed The parked car heating warms the vehicle in terior making snow and ice easier to remove The system uses the fuel of the vehicle for heat generation Parked car ventilation and parked car heating can be switched on and off directly or via a pre set departure time The reel on time is automatically determined based on the external temperature The sys tem promptly switches on before the selected departure time Information DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila tion is insufficient harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle The exhaust gases con tain carbon monoxide an odorless and color less but highly
312. ptional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Fuel recommendation General information Depending on the region many gas stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions Fuel that is available in winter helps make a cold start easier e g Information CAUTION Even fuels that conform to the specifica tions can be of low quality This may cause en gine problems for instance poor engine start up behavior poor handling and or poor performance There is risk of property damage In case of engine problems switch gas sta tions or use a brand name fuel with a higher octane rating lt Gasoline For the best fuel efficiency the gasoline should be sulfur free or very low in sulfur con tent Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con taining metal must not be used 252 CAUTION Even small amounts of wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys tem and the engine Furthermore the catalytic converter is permanently damaged There is risk of property damage Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines gt Leaded gasoline gt Metallic additives e g manga
313. r gt For vehicles equipped with Comfort seats in the front automatic positioning of the backrest for the front passenger seat gt For vehicles equipped with Comfort seats in the rear automatic positioning of the backrests for the rear passenger seats After a critical driving situation without an acci dent the front belts are loosened again All other systems can be restored to the desired setting If the belt tension does not loosen automati cally stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt using the red button in the buckle Fasten the belt before continuing on your trip Post Crash iBrake The concept In certain accident situations e g collision the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automat ically without driver intervention This can re duce the risk of a further collision and the con sequences thereof At standstill After coming to a halt the brake is released automatically Harder vehicle braking It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer tain situations to a halt quicker Here a higher braking pressure must be gen erated for a short period when pressing the brake pedal than during automatic braking This interrupts automatic braking Interrupting automatic braking It can be necessary to interrupt automatic braking in certain situations e g for an evasive maneuver Interrupt automatic braking gt By pressing the brake pedal gt By pressing the accelerator pedal Atten
314. r TPM 265 Retaining straps securing cargo 238 Retreaded tires 259 Roadside parking lights 130 Roller sunblinds 72 RON recommended fuel grade 252 Roofliner 18 Roof load capacity 299 Roof mounted luggage rack 238 Rope for tow starting towing 289 Route ahead assistant 244 RSC Run Flat System Com ponent see Run flat tires 260 Rubber components care 293 Run flat tires 260 S Safe braking 235 Safety belt reminder for driv er s seat and front passen ger seat 81 Safety belts 80 Safety belts care 293 Safety package see Active Protection 160 Safety switch windows 71 Safety systems airbags 136 Safety systems see Intelli gent Safety 139 Saving fuel 240 Screen see Control Dis play 21 Screwdriver see Onboard ve hicle tool kit 281 Screw thread for tow fitting see tow starting towing thread for tow fitting see tow starting towing 289 Sealant 260 Seat belts see Safety belts 80 Seat cushion heating 91 Seat heating 91 Seating position for chil dren 93 Seat mirror and steering wheel memory 87 Seats 76 Seats front 76 Seats rear 78 Seat ventilation 92 Selection list in instrument cluster 121 Selector lever Steptronic transmission 106 Self leveling suspension 200 Sensors care 294 Service and warranty 8 Service requirements Condi tion Based Service CBS 279 Service requirements dis play 119 Services ConnectedDrive 6 309 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330
315. r Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 With parking assistant side protection The concept Obstacles on the side of the vehicle are de tected by the sensors of the system The sys tem warns against these obstacles Display Obstacle markings are displayed sideways on the vehicle to protect the vehicle sides gt Gray markings the area next to the vehicle was not captured No markings no obstacles were detected gt Color markings warning against detected obstacles Limits of side protection The system only displays stationary obstacles that were previously detected by sensors while passing them The system does not detect whether an ob stacle moves later on For this reason at standstill the markings are shown in the dis play in gray after a certain time The area next to the vehicle must be newly captured System limits Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances gt For small children and animals 183 Controls Driver assistance systems gt For persons with certain clothing e g coats gt With external interference of the ultra sound e g from passing vehicles or loud machines gt When sensors are dirty iced over dam aged or out of position gt Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity rain snowfall ex treme heat or strong wind gt With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
316. r another qualified service center or repair shop Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Care Mobility Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 ee e aD A Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Reference This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need Reference Technical data Technical data Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to Information The technical data and specifications in this Owner s Manual are used as guidance values The vehicle specific data can deviate from this for example due to the selected special equip ment country version or country specific measurement method Detailed values can be Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the model version equipment or country specific measurement method The specified heights do not take into account attached parts for example a roof antenna BMW 7 Series Sedan Width with mirrors Width without mirrors Height Height L models Length Length L models Wheelbase Wheelbase L models Smallest turning radius diam Smallest turning radius diam L models 298 the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related funct
317. r armrest gt Operating readiness is switched on The SIM card is inserted in the snap in adapter or the SIM Access Profile is active About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Mobile devices eS Connect new device 5 Press the button on the snap in adapter for approx 3 seconds until the signal tone sounds once The LED above the button flashes green 44 6 Enter the Bluetooth passkey for the snap in adapter at the Control Display 7 Sy Telephone The device is connected and displayed in the device list WLAN connection Functional requirements ConnectedDrive contract Data contract with a service provider WLAN capable device WLAN activated on the device WLAN hotspot activated in the vehicle Vehicle is stationary vy vy vy yoy y Operating readiness switched on Activating WLAN hotspot About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Mobile devices Settings SY Internet hotspot Connecting device with WLAN hotspot About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Mobile devices Connect new device ation Internet hotspot ee Sh S Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis played on the Control Display 6 Search for WLAN networks on the device Select network name on the device 7 Enter hotspot code on the device and con nect Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 General settings Ataglance a glance The device conn
318. r patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions The tires can be rotated between the axles to achieve even wear A dealer s service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop will be glad to answer addi tional questions at any time After rotating check the tire pressure and correct if needed Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Always protect tires against all contact with oil grease and fuels Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire Run flat tires Label RSC label on the tire sidewall The wheels consist of tires that are self sup porting to a limited degree and possibly spe cial rims The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire 260 Changing run flat tires For your own safety only use run flat tires No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire A dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop will be glad to an swer additional questions at any time Repairing a flat tire Safety measures gt Park the vehicle as
319. rations Status of the Owner s Manual Basic information The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan dards In rare cases therefore the features de scribed in this Owner s Manual may differ from those in your vehicle Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner s Handbook for Vehicle Own safety Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require ments applying in the country of first delivery also known as homologation If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operating conditions and permit re quirements If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a cer tain country you may not be able to lodge war ranty claims for your vehicle there Further in formation on warranty Is available from a dealer s service center Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology e g the use of modern materials and high performance electronics requires suitable maintenance and repair work The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to a BMW dealer s service center If you choose to use another service f
320. re Moni tor TPM 265 Initializing Flat Tire Monitor FTM 269 Instrument cluster 113 Instrument lighting 133 Integral Active Steering 166 Integrated key 54 Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle 49 Intelligent Emergency Re quest 286 Intelligent Safety 139 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Intensity AUTO pro gram 204 Interior equipment 215 Interior lights 133 Interior lights during unlock ing 60 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 61 Interior motion sensor 70 Interior rearview mirror auto matic dimming feature 86 Internet page 6 Interval display service re quirements 119 lonization see Ambient air package 211 J Jacking points for the vehicle jack 282 Joystick Steptronic transmis sion 106 Jump starting 287 K Key remote control 54 Keyless Go see Comfort Ac cess 65 Kickdown Steptronic trans mission 106 Knee airbag 137 L Label on recommended tires 259 Lamp in the exterior mirror see Active Blind Spot De tection 153 Lamp in the exterior mirror see crossing traffic warn ing 197 Lamp replacement 282 Lamp replacement front 282 Lamp replacement rear 282 Lane departure warning 150 Lane margin warning 150 Language on the Control Display 38 Lashing eyes securing cargo 238 LATCH child restraint sys tem 95 Launch Control 106 Leather care 292 LEDs replace light emitting diodes 282 Lig
321. rear General information Depending on the vehicle s equipment BMW Touch Command is located in the rear console or in the center armrest in the rear 36 Control elements at a glance Control elements A 1 BMW Touch Command 2 Switching on off 3 Removing Tray The tray in the center armrest in the rear has the following functions gt Storage and locking gt Recharge the battery Insert BMW Touch Command into the tray with the screen facing upward to ensure proper locking To charge the battery insert BMW Touch Command with the multifunction socket to the left Buttons on the BMW Touch Command Press but Function ton O Display list of last used applica tions CD Display BMW application press button twice as needed gt Back Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 BMW Touch Command Ataglance a glance Operating concept 1 D Press button The main menu of the BMW application is displayed 2 Swipe to the left or right to display further menus 3 Tap on the desired menu 4 Adjust the settings Exit the BMW application Tap on menu item Apps Further information is displayed Language setting The menu language depends on the iDrive set tings Setting back to factory settings BMW Touch Command can be set back to fac tory settings All data and personal settings in the device memory is deleted and the connection to the vehicle is interrupted 1
322. refer to page 42 If pairing was unsuccessful What to do if re fer to page 47 Connecting the device via near field communication NFC With near field communication NDC data can be transmitted over short distances using radio technology Overview L The NFC antenna is in the instrument panel below the hazard warning flashers The device must be unlocked while pairing compatible devices refer to page 42 43 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GKE General settings Pairing is also possible while driving 1 Activate the NFC function on the device see the owner s manual of the device 2 Hold the device close to the NFC antenna 3 Compare the control number on the Con trol Display with the control number on the display of the device Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display or Confirm the connection on the device 4 The device is connected and displayed in the device list There is a display of which features the mobile phone supports refer to page 42 Depending on which functions are already oc cupied the device is connected with the phone additional phone or music function If pairing was unsuccessful What to do if re fer to page 47 Pairing the snap in adapter in the rear with the vehicle gt The Bluetooth passkey on the back of the snap in adapter is known gt The snap in adapter is installed in the cen te
323. ressure 254 Tire inflation pressure moni tor see FTM 268 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 264 Tires changing 258 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Everything from A to Z Reference Tire sealant 260 Tires everything on wheels and tires 254 Tires run flat tires 260 Tire tread 258 Tone 6 Tool 281 Top View see Surround View 187 Total vehicle weight 299 Touchpad 26 Touchscreen 25 Tow fitting see tow starting towing 289 Towing 289 Towing see tow starting towing 289 Tow starting 289 TPM Tire Pressure Moni tor 264 Traction control 164 TRACTION driving dynam ics 164 Traffic Jam Assist see Steer ing and lane guidance assis tant 177 Transmission lock electronic unlocking 106 Transmission see Steptronic transmission 106 Transporting children safely 93 Tread tires 258 Trip computer 125 Trip information see onboard computer on the Control Display 125 Triple turn signal activa tion 103 Trip odometer 123 Trip recorder see Trip odom eter 123 Trunk lid closing with no touch activation 66 Trunk lid emergency unlock ing 65 Trunk lid hotel function 65 Trunk lid opening with no touch activation 66 Trunk lid via remote con trol 61 Turn signal bulb replace ment 282 Turn signals operation 103 U Unintentional alarm 70 Units of measurement 39 Universal remote control 215 Unlock button Steptronic transmission 106 Unlocking automatic 68
324. rieving personal settings before delivering the vehicle to a workshop e g The profiles backed up can be taken into another vehicle The following export options are available gt Via ConnectedDrive gt Via USB interface refer to page 221 toa USB device About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Driver profiles The profile marked with this symbol can be exported 3 Select profile 4 Export driver profile gt USB device USB device Select USB device as needed gt ConnectedDrive Importing profiles The existing settings of the active profile are overwritten with the settings of the imported profile About iDrive My Vehicle 2 Driver profiles The profile marked with this symbol can be overwritten 3 Select profile 4 Import driver profile 5 Select the medium using which the profile was exported gt USB device USB device Select USB device as needed gt ConnectedDrive 6 Select profile 60 Using the remote control Information WARNING People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in The vehicle can then not be opened from the outside There is risk of injuries Take the remote control along so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside Unlocking EN Press button on the remote control Depending on the settings refer to page 67 the following access points are unlocked gt Driver s door and fue
325. rking lamp on off Welcome lights and headlight courtesy delay feature Welcome lights General information Depending on the equipment the exterior lighting of the vehicle can be set individually Activating deactivating About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Lighting Exterior lighting 2 f Select desired setting gt Welcome lights Parking lights and tail lamps are switched on for a limited time gt Door handle lighting Door handles and the ground in front of the doors are illuminated for a limited time gt Light carpet The area next to the vehicle is illumi nated for a limited time 130 Headlight courtesy delay feature General information The low beams stay lit for a particular time if the high beams are switched on after opera tional readiness is switched on Setting the duration About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Lighting Exterior lighting Pathway lighting ao a Ss Select desired setting Automatic headlight control The concept The low beams are switched on and off auto matically depending on the ambient bright ness e g in tunnels in twilight or if there is precipitation General information A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on When emerging from a tunnel during the day the low beams are not switched off immedi ately but instead only after approx 2 minutes Activating
326. rn on the Entertainment sound output if needed 2 Press button on the steering wheel 3 Media and radios 4 Tone Adjusting Setting the voice dialog Set system to standard dialog or use a short version The short version of the voice dialog plays back short messages in abbreviated form About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Language Speech mode SS Sf Select desired setting 34 Selecting the input language For some languages the input language can be selected About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Language Voice control oS sh a Select desired setting Activating encrypted connection By activating an encrypted connection the quality of voice recognition will be improved About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Language ey Speech recognition via server amp Encrypted connection active Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button during the spoken in structions until the desired volume is set gt The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed gt The volume is stored for the drive profile currently used Information on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini tiate an Emergency Request In stressful situa tions the voice and vocal pitch can change This can unnecessarily delay the establish ment of a phone connection Instead use the SOS button refer to pa
327. rom a height of approx 16 in 40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully The hood must audibly engage on both sides Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Engine oil Mobility Engine oll Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations for example gt Sporty driving style gt Break in of the engine gt Idling of the engine gt With use of engine oil types that are not approved Therefore regularly check the engine oil level after refueling The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil measurement The electronic oil measurement has two meas uring principles gt Status display gt Detailed measurement Electronic oil measurement Status display The concept The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and shown on the Control Dis play If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level a check control messag
328. rview mirror and the hand held transmitter and repeat the step Several more attempts at different distan ces may be necessary Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts Canada if programming with the hand held transmitter was interrupted hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand held transmitter button for 2 sec onds 7 Toprogram other functions on other but tons repeat steps 3 to 5 The systems can be controlled using the inte rior rearview mirror buttons Special feature of the alternating code wireless system If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming please check if the system to be controlled features an alternat ing code system 216 For systems with an alternating code system the universal garage door opener and the sys tem also have to be synchronized Please read the operating manual to find out how to synchronize the system Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec ond person To synchronize i Park the vehicle within range of the re mote controlled system Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed You have approx 30 seconds for the next step Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it If necessary repeat this step up to three tim
329. s at sea or on a trailer gt With animals in the vehicle Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked The indicator lamp lights up for approx 2 sec onds and then continues to flash The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked again Switching off the alarm gt Unlock the vehicle using the remote con trol if needed through emergency detec tion of the remote control refer to page 55 70 gt With Comfort Access if you are carrying the remote control on your person grasp the driver side or front passenger side door handle completely Power windows Information WARNING Unattended children or animals can move the vehicle and endanger themselves and traffic e g with the following actions V Pressing the Start Stop button Releasing the parking brake Opening and closing of doors or windows Y V N Shifting the selector lever into neutral Using vehicle equipment There is risk of accidents or injuries Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve hicle Carry remote control along when exiting and lock the vehicle wer Opening gt P Press the button to the resistance point The window opens while the switch is held gt EE Press the switch beyond the resist ance point The window opens automatical
330. s canceled in the following situa tions gt Automatically after approx 3 seconds When returning to your own lane When braking hard When using the turn signal Y V M y When DSC is actively controlling stability System limits Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations gt In heavy fog rain or snowfall gt Inthe event of missing worn poorly visi ble merging diverging or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas gt When lane markings are covered in snow ice dirt or water gt In tight curves or on narrow lanes gt When the lane markings are covered by objects gt When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you gt If there are constant blinding effects be cause of oncoming light e g from the sun low in the sky gt When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over dirty or cov ered with stickers etc gt During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle delivery A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Controls Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are the more warnings are displayed However there may also be an excess of undesired warnings Active Blind Spot Detection The concept Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor the are
331. s installed near the interior rear view mirror Keep the windshield in the area behind the in terior rearview mirror clean and clear 141 Safety With Active Cruise Control radar sensor The radar sensor is located in the lower area of the front bumper Always keep radar sensor clean and unob structed Switching on off Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving off Switching on off manually Press button The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off all systems are now switched on Configure INDIVIDUAL depending on the equipment version the Intelligent Safety sys tems can be individually configured The indi vidual settings are activated and stored for the profile currently used As soon as a setting is changed on the menu all settings of the menu are activated the button lights up orange Press button repeatedly It is switched between the following settings ALL ON All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions 142 INDIVIDUAL the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in dividually switched off Press and hold this button All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off Press Status button Button lights up green all Intelli
332. s must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re quired by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinfla tion or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure RSC Run flat tires Run flat tires refer to page 260 are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall 257 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Wheels and tires M S Winter and all season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0 12 in 3 mm There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tire tread depth is less than 0 12 in 3 mm Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0 16 in 4 mm Below a tread depth of 0 16 in 4 mm tires are less suitable for winter operation Minimum tread depth 7 d f 4 fi 4l N Wear indicators are distributed around the tire s circumference and have the legally re quired minimum height of 0 063 in 1 6 mm They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI Tread Wear Indicator Tire damage General information Inspect your
333. s stored for the drive profile cur rently used Units of measurement Setting the units of measurement Set the units for e g fuel consumption routes distances and temperature About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Units Select the desired menu item oo Sh Select desired setting The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Control Display Brightness About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings 3 Displays 4 Control display 5 Brightness at night 6 Turn the controller until the desired bright ness Is set 7 Press the controller 39 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GECUL General settings The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Depending on the light conditions the bright ness settings may not be clearly visible Screen saver If no settings are made via iDriver after a time that can be set a screen saver is displayed About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Pop ups Screensaver ee YS Select desired setting The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently used Messages The concept The menu centrally displays all messages ar riving in the vehicle in list form The following messages can be displayed gt Traffic messages gt Check Control messages gt Communication messages e g e mail SMS or Twitter gt Service requirements messages
334. s the operat ing state of the front seat passenger airbag The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei ther activated or deactivated After drive readiness is switched on the lamp briefly lights up and then indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated gt The indicator lamp lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint fix ing system or when the seat is empty The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated PASSENGER Wg AIRBAG OFF AX2 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Controls gt The indicator lamp does not light up when e g a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat The airbags on the front passenger side are activated Detected child seats The system generally detects children seated in a child seat particularly in child seats re quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu factured After installing a child seat make sure that the indicator lamp for the front seat passenger airbags lights up This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front seat passenger airbags are not activated Strength of the driver s and front seat passenger airbag The explosive power that activates driver s front passenger s airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver s front passeng er s seat With a respective message appearing on Con trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep the ac
335. safety belts gt Wear the belt twist free and as tight to your body as possible over your lap and shoulders gt Wear the belt deep on your hips over your lap The belt may not press on your stom ach gt Do not wear the belt on your throat rub it on sharp edges guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects Avoid thick clothing Re tighten the belt frequently upward around your upper body Buckling the belt General information lt y f Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle N Tensioning the safety belt automatically When the belt is closed the driver s and pas senger s belt straps are automatically tight ened once after driving away Unbuckling the belt 1 Hold the belt firmly 2 Press the red button in the belt buckle 3 Guide the belt back into its roll up mecha nism Safety belt reminder for driver s seat and front passenger seat e The indicator lamp lights up and a sig nal sounds Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly The safety belt reminder is active at soeeds above approx 6 mph 10 km h It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat Safety mode In critical situations e g during full brake ap plication the front safety belts tighten auto matically If the situation passes without an accident oc curring the belt tension relaxes If the belt tension does not loosen automa
336. ses Information WARNING If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys tems are not correctly engaged the protective effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys tem can be limited There is risk of injuries or danger to life Make sure that the lower an chors are securely engaged and that the LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se curely against the backrest lt Position The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair 2 of LATCH sym isorix bols It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat Use the vehicle seat belt instead for the middle seat Before installing LATCH child restraint systems Pull the belt away from the area of the child re straint system Without comfort seats in the rear Assembly of LATCH child restraint systems 1 Install child restraint system see manufac turer s information 2 Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop erly connected With comfort rear seats Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1 Before mounting adjust the seats to their basic position refer to page 80 2 For better accessibility tilt the backrest back slightly 3 Install child restraint system see manufac turer s information 4 Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop erly connected 5 After mounting
337. shown to be correct it is possible that the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform areset Then perform the reset Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Wheels and tires Mobility If identification of flat tire damage is not possible please contact a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop 2 Fixing a flat tire where applicable with the Mobility System 3 Replacing a damaged tire where applica ble with the emergency wheel Use of sealant e g the Mobility System may damage the TPM wheel electronics In this case have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if needed Run flat tires Maximum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph 80 km h Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire 1 Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Donot exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h 3 Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is shown to be correct it is possible that the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform a reset In that case carry out a reset Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load driv ing style and road conditions A vehicle with an average load has
338. ss button for the desired driving mode sev eral times Configure INDIVIDUAL driving mode 1 Activate desired driving mode with Driving Dynamics Control switch 2 Configure INDIVIDUAL Select desired setting The individual configuration of the driving mode is taken over for the active profile The last set configuration is activated directly when the driving mode is called up With activating of the drive ready state the COMFORT driving mode is selected automatically Displays in the instrument cluster The selected drive mode is dis played in the instrument cluster Display on the Control Display Drive mode changes can be briefly shown on the Control Display About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Driving Experience Control 4 Driving mode information in control display Driving modes in detail COMFORT The concept Balanced tuning between dynamic and con sumption optimized driving Switching on Press button repeatedly until COM FORT is displayed in the instrument COMFORT cluster COMFORT PLUS The concept Particularly comfortable tuning for optimum traveling comfort Switching on Press button repeatedly until COM FORT PLUS is displayed in the instru ment cluster COMFORT SPORT The concept Dynamic tuning for higher agility Switching on Press button SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster SPORT SPORT INDIVIDUAL The concept
339. stem is automatically interrupted in the following situations gt Ataspeed above 130 mph 210 km h When the steering wheel is released When you manipulate steering When you leave your own lane When the turn signal is on When the lane is too narrow VV VV VV If for a particular time no lane marking is detected and there is no vehicle driving in front Steering wheel symbol lights up gray o gt The system is paused and does not manipulate steering If the system conditions are met the system reactivates automatically 179 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Displays in the instrument cluster Description Symbol Steering wheel symbol gray the system is on standby Steering wheel symbol green system activated Steering wheel symbol and lane marking green the system assists the driver in keeping the vehicle within the lane Steering wheel symbol green lane marking gray no lane marking detected The vehicle follows the vehicle in front Steering wheel symbol yellow hold steering wheel The sys tem is still active Steering wheel symbol red and a signal tone sounds system interrupted It does not manip ulate steering Displays in the Head up Display All system information can also be displayed in the Head up Display System limits When driving with gloves or with protective covers contact with the steering wheel cannot be detected
340. stops the mo tion Opening closing the glass sunroof and front sliding visor together Briefly press the switch twice in succession in the desired direc tion past the resistance point y The glass sunroof and sliding vi sor move together Pressing the switch upward stops the motion gt See also Convenient opening refer to page 61 via remote control gt See also closing by means of Comfort Ac cess refer to page 65 14 Comfort position If the glass sunroof is not automatically com pletely opened the comfort position has been attained In this position the wind noises in the interior are the least If desired continue the movement by Pressing the switch Opening closing the rear sliding visor On the roofliner control panel Press button to open the rear sliding visor Press button again to stop the movement ra Press button to close the sliding visor Press button again to stop the move ment On the control panel in the rear doors The rear sliding visor cannot be used via the buttons in the rear if the safety function refer to page 71 is switched on Press the button to open the closed sliding visor or to close the open slid ing visor Press button again to stop the movement When the button is pressed again the sliding visor will move in the opposite direction BMW Touch Command The rear sliding visor can also be operated us ing BMW Touch Command Actions during
341. strument clus ter System limits Basic limits System operation is limited in situations such as the following gt On steep hills in steep depressions or in tight curves gt When the camera is dirty or the protective glass is damaged In heavy fog rain or snowfall gt At very high external temperatures Limits of pedestrian and animal detection In some situations it may occur that pedes trians are detected as animals or animals as pedestrians Small animals are not detected by the object detection function even if they are clearly visi ble in the image Limited detection e g in the following circum stances gt People or animals who are fully or partially covered especially when their heads are covered gt People who are not in an upright position e g lying down gt Cyclists on unconventional bicycles e g recumbent bicycles gt After physical damage to the system e g after an accident No display on the rear screen The image from Night Vision cannot be dis played on the rear screen 150 Lane departure warning The concept This system alerts at speeds be tween 45 mph 70 km h and 130 mph 210 km h when the vehicle on roads with lane markings is about to leave the lane The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the event of warnings The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving sit uation The system does not provide a warning if th
342. systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Information WARNING With the engine hot and the cooling sys tem open coolant can escape and lead to burns There is risk of injuries Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down lt WARNING Additives are harmful and incorrect addi tives can damage the engine There is risk of injuries and risk of property damage Avoid the contact of articles of clothing skin or eyes with additives Do not swallow any additives Use suitable additives only lt Coolant consists of water and additives Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle Information about suit able additives is available from a dealer s serv ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop Coolant level General information Vehicles with gasoline engine feature two cooling circuits Always check the coolant lev els of both coolant reservoirs and refill as needed The coolant level is indicted using minimum and maximum markings Depending on the coolant reservoir the minimum and maximum markings are located at different locations Overview Opening the hood refer to page 272 Depending on the engine installation the cool ant reservoir is located on the right side or the left side of the engine compartment refer to page 271 Checking the coolant level in the filler
343. t 2 Remove flap 3 Pull handle down arrow 1 and fold panel forward arrow 2 Opening through loading with comfort seats 1 If equipped with rear console fold down center armrest 2 If equipped with rear console push cover upward until it engages Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Interior equipment Controls 3 Fold the folding table down 3 Pull on the loop Folding table in the rear General information There is a folding table in the center armrest of the rear console Information WARNING A folded out folding table protrudes into the vehicle s interior and in case of accident braking or evasive maneuvers can Cause inju ries Objects on the table can be thrown around the car s interior while driving There is risk of injuries Do not unfold or use folding ta ble while driving lt Folding the folding table open 1 Open the center armrest refer to page 227 2 Grasp the folding table in the rear and pull forward out from the center armrest Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 The folding table can be rotated by 90 or 180 to the left and can be enlarged Proceed in reverse order to fold in the folding table Rear cooler Information WARNING The cover of the opened cooler pro trudes into the car s interior Injuries can occur in the event of an accident braking or evasive maneuver The content of the cooler can be thr
344. t As long as there is active braking the system is on standby The system does not brake the vehicle during this time Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever position D or R Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed Specify desired speed in the range from ap prox 4 mph 6 km h to approx 15 mph 25 km h using the rocker switch of the cruise control on the steering wheel Vehicle speed can be changed by lightly accelerating 165 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driving stability control systems gt Press the rocker switch up to the point of resistance the speed increases gradually gt Press up the rocker switch past the point of resistance the speed increases while the rocker switch is pressed gt Press the rocker switch down to the point of resistance the speed decreases gradu ally gt Press the rocker switch down past the point of resistance when driving forward the speed decreases to approx 6 mph 10 km h when reversing the speed decreases to approx 4 mph 6 km h Overview Button in the vehicle Activating HDC P Press button The LED above the button lights up 166 Deactivating HDC WH Press button again and the LED goes out HDC is automatically deactivated above approx 37 mph 60 km h Display in the instrument cluster Status display A symbol and the selected de sired speed are displayed 2T The desired speed is hidden af
345. t The system is used to detect certain critical driving situations that might lead to an acci dent Critical driving situations are gt Emergency stop gt Severe understeering gt Severe oversteering Certain functions of several systems can within the system limits lead to Active Pro tection triggering gt Collision warning with braking function de tection of imminent front collisions or auto matic braking intervention gt Collision warning with braking function or Night Vision with Dynamic Marker Light brake booster gt Rear collision prevention detection of im minent rear collisions Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility Due to the system lim its critical situation could not be detected reli ably or in time There is risk of an accident Ad just the driving style to the traffic conditions Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in the respective situations lt Function When the belt is closed the driver s and pas senger s belt straps are automatically tight ened once after driving away In accident critical situations the following in dividual functions become active as needed gt The front belts are automatically preten sioned gt Automatic window closing up to a narrow gap Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Controls gt Automatic closing of the glass sunroof in cluding sliding viso
346. t cluster The drivetrain is OFF switched off and operating read iness switched on Drive readiness The concept Activating drive readiness corresponds to switching on the engine 20 Information Some functions such as DSC can only be used in drive readiness state Observe further hints regarding drive readiness refer to page 97 Activating drive readiness Drive readiness is switched on via the Start Stop button 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Press the Start Stop button Display READY is displayed in the in strument cluster Switch off drive readiness Press the Start Stop button to switch off the drive readiness The vehicle switches into op erating readiness state Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 iDrive Ataglance a glance iDrive Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems The concept The iDrive combines the functions of many switches These functions can be operated via controller or touchscreen Information WARNING Operating the integrated information system and communic
347. t jam protec tion Initializing after a power failure After a power failure during the opening or closing process the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running During the initialization the glass sunroof closes without jam protection WARNING Body parts can be jammed on operating the glass sunroof There is risk of injuries Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos ing lt until the initialization is com N plete A YEN 7 Press the switch up and hold it Initialization begins within 15 seconds and is com pleted when the glass sun roof and sliding visor are completely closed gt The glass sunroof closes without jam pro tection 19 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Adjusting Adjusting Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country specific and optional features offered with the series It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car e g due to the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and systems The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution
348. t use the Launch Con trol refer to page 109 Engine transmission and axle drive Up to 1 200 miles 2 000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed gt For gasoline engine 4 500 rpm and 100 mph 160 km h Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum stances From 1 200 miles 2 000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur ing circumstances when tires are brand new 234 they achieve their full traction potential after a break in time Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles 300 km Brake system Brakes require an initial break in period of ap prox 300 miles 500 km to achieve optimal per formance between brake discs and brake pads Drive moderately during this break in pe riod Following part replacement The same break in procedures should be ob served if any of the components above men tioned have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle s operating life General driving notes Closing the trunk lid WARNING An open trunk lid protrudes from the ve hicle and can endanger occupants and other traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident braking or evasive ma neuvers In addition exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage Do not drive with the trunk lid open lt If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided
349. te sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously A Check Control message is displayed No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de tected Examples and recommendations in the follow ing situations gt A wheel without TPM electronics is mounted e g emergency wheel Have it 267 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Wheels and tires checked by a dealer s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop as needed gt Malfunction Have system checked by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop gt TPM was unable to complete the reset Reset the system again gt Interference through systems or devices with the same radio frequency After leav ing the area of the interference the system automatically becomes active again Declaration according to NHTSA FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires
350. tegrated Owner s Manual The Integrated owner s manual consists of four parts which offer various levels of infor mation or possible access Quick Reference Guide The Quick Reference Guide provides informa tion how to operate the car how to use basic vehicle functions or what to do in case of a breakdown This information can also be dis played while driving Search by images Image search provides information and de scriptions This is helpful when the terminol ogy for a feature is not at hand Keyword search Search for information and descriptions by en tering terms selected from the index Videos The basic functions of selected systems are explained in the videos Select components l Ea Press button My Vehicle Owner s Manual Rw Nh a Select desired setting Scrolling through the owner s manual Turn controller until the next or previous con tents are displayed Context help Owner s Manual to the temporarily selected function You may open the relevant information di rectly Opening via the iDrive To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the Options menu 1 orron Press button 2 Owner s Manual Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display Ti Owner s Manual 49 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GEE Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle
351. ter one time pairing the devices are au tomatically recognized and reconnected when operating readiness is switched on Configuring the device Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 System settings 3 Mobile devices 4 Select the desired device 5 Select desired setting If a function is assigned to a device the func tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a device that is already connected and the de vice will be disconnected Connecting a specific device About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Mobile devices Select device aS eS Connect device The functions that were assigned to the device before unpairing are assigned to the device when it is reconnected If the device is already connected these functions are deactivated Disconnecting the device The connection of the device to the vehicle is disconnected 45 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GKE General settings The device remains pairs and can be con nected again refer to page 45 About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Mobile devices Select device ae eee Disconnect device Deleting the device The device is disconnected and removed from the device list About iDrive My Vehicle System settings Mobile devices Select device a i Delete device Swapping the telephone and
352. ter the dates for the required inspections The deadline for scheduled mainte nance or a legally mandated inspec tion is approaching The service deadline has already passed Make sure that the vehicle s date and time are set correctly About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle status Service required Vehicle inspection Date Select desired setting Sa SS o Confirm The entered date is stored Automatic Service Request Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections are automati cally transmitted to your dealer s service cen ter before a service due date You can check when your dealer s service cen ter was notified About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle status 3 a Service Request 119 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Displays Gear shift indicator The concept The system recommends the most fuel effi cient gear for the current driving situation General information Depending on the vehicle s features and coun try version of the vehicle the gear shift indica tor is active in the manual mode of the Step tronic transmission Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis played in the instrument cluster On vehicles without a gear shift indicator the engaged gear is displayed Displays Example Description Fuel efficient gear is set Shift into fuel efficient gear 2 gt 3 Speed limit detection
353. teral impact the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area Head airbag In a lateral impact the head airbag supports the head Information Provided by 136 6 DEALER Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Safety Controls Ejection Mitigation The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion e g in less severe accidents or rear end collisions Information for optimum effect of the airbags WARNING If the seat position is incorrect or the de ployment area of the airbags is impacted the airbag system cannot protect as intended or cause additional injuries due to triggering There is risk of injuries or danger to life Ob serve the Information for optimum protective effect of the airbag system lt gt Keep at a distance from the airbags Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim Hold your hands at the 3 o clock and 9 o clock positions to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is trig gered gt Make sure that the front passenger is sit ting correctly i e keeps his or her feet and legs in the floor area gt M
354. th panoramic glass sunroof open close glass sunroof front sliding visor 2 With panoramic glass sunroof close rear sliding visor 3 With panoramic glass sunroof open rear sliding visor Lifting closing glass sunroof Push switch briefly upward WV gt The closed glass sunroof is tilted and the sliding visor N opens slightly gt The opened glass sunroof closes until it is in its tilted position The sliding visor does not move 73 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Opening and closing gt The tilted glass sunroof is being closed Opening closing the glass sunroof and front sliding visor separately re a gt Press the switch in the de l sired direction to the resist ance point and hold it there The sliding visor opens as long as the switch is held down If the sliding visor is already fully open the glass sunroof opens The glass sunroof closes as long as the switch is held down If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position the sliding visor closes gt Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point The sliding visor opens automatically If the sliding visor is already fully open the glass sunroof opens automatically The glass sunroof closes automatically If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position the sliding visor closes au tomatically Pressing the switch upward
355. the camera image General information The following camera perspectives can be dis played gt Automatic camera perspective the system shows the camera perspective suitable for the respective driving situation refer to page 188 gt Rearview camera to represent the areas behind the vehicle refer to page 188 gt Top view onto the vehicle Top View refer to page 188 gt Right hand and left hand side view for rep resenting the areas on the sides of the ve hicle refer to page 191 gt Camera perspective movable via iDrive re fer to page 188 gt Panorama View to present cross traffic e g at junctions and driveways depending on the currently engaged gear refer to page 191 Depending on the view the environment around the vehicle or a part of it is depicted Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess the traffic situation There is risk of an accident Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi tions Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively interfere in the respective situations lt Overview Buttons in the vehicle Py Surround View Panorama View 187 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driver assistance systems Cameras The camera perspective suitable for the re spective driving situation is displayed Switching on off manually Press button PY gt On the LED
356. the cli mate control output are adjusted Under certain conditions the engine is auto matically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position The vehicle con tinues traveling with the engine idling to re duce fuel consumption Selector lever position D remains engaged In addition context sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con sumption driving style The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range Overview The system includes the following EfficientDynamics functions and displays gt ECO PRO bonus range refer to page 243 241 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving tips ekg Saving fuel gt ECO PRO tips driving instruction refer to page 243 gt ECO PRO climate control refer to page 242 gt ECO PRO route ahead assistant driving in struction refer to page 244 gt ECO PRO coasting driving status refer to page 245 gt ECO PRO driving style analysis refer to page 246 Activating ECO PRO Press button ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument cluster ECO PRO Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL Opening via the Driving Dynamics Control 1 Activate ECO PRO 2 Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL Opening via iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 3 Driving Experience Control 4 Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL ECO PRO notes Activate the ECO PRO limit ECO PRO s
357. the cup holders under the cover Front center armrest Rear center console If not equipped with rear console 220 Remove the cover Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Interior equipment Controls Rear center armrest There is a socket in the storage compartment in the center armrest arrow In the trunk m3 Fold open the cover USB interface The concept External devices with USB port can be con nected to the USB interface The following audio devices can be connected gt Mobile phones and smartphones sup ported by the USB interface The snap in adapter features a separate USB port that is automatically connected when a compatible mobile phone is in serted gt Audio devices with USB port e g MP3 player gt USB storage devices Common file systems are supported FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats Information about compatible USB devices can be found at www bmwusa com bluetooth The following applications are possible gt Exporting and importing profiles refer to page 58 gt Listening to music files via USB audio Watching video films via USB video Loading of software updates refer to page 46 Information Observe the following when connecting gt Donotuse force when plugging the con nector into the USB interface gt Use a flexible adapter cable Protect the USB device against mechanical damage gt Donotuse the USB interf
358. the driver himself herself to react During a warning the maximum brak ing force is used when the brake is actuated Premise for the brake booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal The system can additionally assist with braking intervention if there is risk of a collision At low speeds the vehicle can be decelerated to a complete stop 146 The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac tively moving the steering wheel Object detection can be restricted Limitations of the detection range and functional restric tions are to be considered System limits Detection range The detection potential of the camera is lim ited Thus a warning might not be issued or be is sued late E g the following situations may not be de tected gt Partially covered pedestrians gt Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour Pedestrians outside of the detection range gt Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in 80 cm Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations gt In heavy fog rain sprayed water or snow fall gt In tight curves If the driving stability control systems are deactivated e g DSC OFF If the field of view of th
359. the rocker switch Displays in the instrument cluster Desired speed Display in the speedometer gt Green marking system is active gt Marking is orange white the system has been paused gt Nomarking system is switched off Status display 3 The selected desired speed is hidden 55 after a brief time If no speed is indicated it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not cur rently fulfilled Distance to vehicle ahead of you Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv ing ahead of you Symbol Description Distance 1 Distance 2 172 Symbol Description Distance 3 Distance 4 This value is set automatically after the system is switched on System interrupted Distance control suppressed briefly because the gas pedal is pressed Vehicle symbol in the distance indicator is moving away detected vehicle drove off ACC is no longer accelerating To accelerate further activate ACC by briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal or pressing the rocker switch Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driver assistance systems Controls Indicator warning lights Description Symbol Green symbols A vehicle has been detected ahead of you The system maintains the set distance to the vehicle in front Vehicle symbol flashes The conditions are not ade quate for the system to work The system was deactivated but applies the
360. the tires and the road surface ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle Driving through water CAUTION When driving too quickly through too deep water water can enter into the engine compartment the electrical system or the Driving tips transmission There is risk of property damage When driving through water do not exceed the maximum indicated water level and the maxi mum speed for driving through water lt Drive through calm water only and only if it is not deeper than 9 8 inches 25 cm and at this height no faster than walking speed up to 3 mph 5 km h Braking safely Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand ard feature Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations needed Steering is still responsive You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef fort Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode In certain braking situations the perforated brake discs can cause functional problems However this has no effect on the perform ance and operational reliability of the brake Objects in the movement area around pedals and floor area WARNING Objects in the driver s floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal There is risk of an accident Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver s flo
361. the vehicle by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop to ensure that all comfort features are fully available and that any Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Replacing components Mobility Check Control messages of these comfort fea tures are no longer displayed Charging the battery General information Make sure that the battery is always suffi ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life The battery may need to be charged in the fol lowing cases gt When making frequent short distance drives gt Ifthe vehicle is not used for prolonged pe riods longer than a month Information CAUTION Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents which means that the 12V on board network can be overloaded or damaged There is risk of property damage Only connect battery charg ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment Starting aid terminals In the vehicle only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals refer to page 288 in the engine compartment with the engine off Power failure After a temporary power loss some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual set tings updated e g gt Seat mirror and steering wheel memory store the positions again Time update gt Date update Glass sunroof i
362. the viewing angle of the cameras are presented hatched in gray Detection of objects Very low obstacles as well as high protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system Assistance functions also take into account data of the PDC Follow instructions in the PDC chapter refer to page 180 The objects displayed on the Control Display under certain circumstances are closer than they appear Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display Malfunction A camera malfunction is displayed on the Con trol Display A yellow symbol is displayed and the A N recording range of the malfunctioning lt camera is displayed in black on the Control Display Parking assistant The concept The system supports parking in the following situations gt When parking parallel to the road gt When reverse parking diagonally to the road Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle The system calculates the best possible park ing line When parking parallel or diagonal to the road the system takes control of steering accelera tion and braking and if needed changes the gears during the parking procedure Hold down the parking assistant button for the duration of the parking procedure At the end of the parking procedure the P selector lever position is set When parking also take note of the visual and acoustic information and instructions issued by the
363. ti cally stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt using the red button in the buckle Fasten the belt before continuing on your trip Damage to safety belts WARNING The protective effect of the safety belts may not be fully functional or fail in the follow ing situations gt Safety belts are damaged soiled or changed in any other way gt Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily soiled gt Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident There is risk of inju ries or danger to life Do not modify safety belts safety belt buckles belt tensioners belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealer s service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop 81 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Adjusting Front head restraints Information WARNING A missing protective effect due to re moved or not correctly adjusted head re straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area There is risk of injuries Install head restraints on occupied seats prior to driving and make sure that the center of the head re straint supports the back of the head at eye level lt WARNING Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area There is risk of injuries gt Do not use seat or head restraint c
364. tializing the once set inflation tire pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire Initialization is started by con firming the tire inflation pressures Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle status Flat Tire Monitor reset Start the engine do not drive off Start the initialization Perform reset a SYS Drive away The initialization is completed while driving which can be interrupted at any time The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes Indication of a flat tire The yellow warning lamp lights up A Check Control message is displayed There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure 1 Reduce your speed and stop cautiously Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run flat tires Run flat tires refer to page 260 are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire s sidewall WARNING A damaged regular tire with low or miss ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling such as steering and braking response Run flat tires can maintain limited stability There is risk of an accident Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run flat tires Observe the information on run flat tires and continued driving with these tires lt When a flat tire is indicated D
365. tion for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Breakdown assistance Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle please observe the following gt Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners gt The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle make sure that the tow rope is taut To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing al ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps Tow fitting General information B ed All The screw in tow fitting should always be car ried in the vehicle The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle tool kit refer to page 281 Information CAUTION If the tow fitting is not used as intended there can be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting There is risk of property damage Observe the notes on using the tow fitting lt Use of the tow fitting 290 gt Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in gt Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only gt Use tow fitting located in the front only for positioning the vehicle gt Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting e g do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting Screw thread for tow fitting Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge T
366. tiveness assistant The concept The system can detect increasing lack of alert ness or fatigue of the driver during long mo notonous journeys e g on highways In this situation it is recommended that the driver takes a break Information WARNING The system does not relieve from the personal responsibility to correctly assess one s physical state An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not be detected in time There is risk of an acci dent Make sure that the driver is rested and alert Adjust the driving style to the traffic con ditions lt Function The system is switched on each time drive readiness is switched on After travel has begun the system is trained about the driver so that increasing lack of alertness or fatigue can be detected This procedure takes the following criteria into account gt Personal driving style e g steering behav lor gt Driving conditions e g length of trip Starting at approximately 43 mph 70 km h the system is active and can display a recommen dation to take a break 161 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Safety Break recommendation Switching on off adjusting The Attentiveness Assistant is active automat ically with each switching on of drive readiness and can thus display a break recommendation The break recommendation can also be switched on or off via iDrive and adjusted About iDri
367. to record in certain crash or near crash like situa tions such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in under standing how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as gt How various systems in your vehicle were operating gt Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened gt How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal gt How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforce ment could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac quired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehi cle or the EDR is needed In addition to the ve hicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to
368. to Transport Canada De fect Investigations and Recalls may call the toll free hotline 1 800 333 0510 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http Awww tc gc ca roadsafety Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Information PO Information Provided by oy Oo eE ANLE r 11 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 ee Ataglance GEE a Cockpit Cockpit Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions This also applies to safety related functions and specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series It also describes features that are not respective features and systems necessarily available in your car e g due to All around the steering wheel AA 2 AA DNL i y un naom 4 Safety switch for the windows and roller sunblinds 71 1 Seating comfort features 3 VW Gentleman function 78 4 Seat mirror and steering wheel SET memory 87 Power windows 70 a 5 Exterior mirror operation 85 Massage function 88 x 6 Lights Z Front fog lights 132 2 Roller sunblind in the rear win D dow 72 Night Vision 147 A Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Cockpit Ataglance a glance Lights off Automatic headlight con trol 130 Daytime running lights 131 Parking lights 129 Cruise control on off 175 Acti
369. to clean the air from sus pended particles Together with the selected fragrance ionization enhances well being and relaxation while driving lonization lonization cleans the vehicle s interior air of suspended particles Switching ionization on off About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Climate functions Air quality ee ie Ionization 211 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Climate control An indicator in the climate control display sig nals that the ionization is switched on lonization can also be operated using BMW Touch Command Fragrancing General information Perfuming is done at intervals in order to avoid a habituation effect Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow comfortable switching between the fragrances The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove compartment Overview Button in the center console c BES enn feet Switch fragrancing on off adjust in tensity Functional requirements gt Fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled gt Interior temperature between 41 F 5 C and 104 F 40 C Selecting the fragrance Two different fragrances can be selected in the vehicle About iDrive 1 My Vehicle 2 Vehicle settings 212 3 Climate functions 4 Air quality 5 Fragrance 6 Select desired setting The setting is stored for the drive profile cur rently
370. to relaxed fatigue free driving The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with gt Safety belts refer to page 80 gt Head restraints refer to page 82 gt Airbags refer to page 136 Front seats Information WARNING Seat adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat Vehicle control could be lost There is risk of an acci dent Only adjust the side on the driver s side when the vehicle is stationary lt WARNING With a backrest inclined too far to the rear the protective effect of the safety belt cannot be ensured anymore There is a danger of sliding under the safety belt in an accident There is risk of injuries or danger to life Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip Adjust the 76 backrest in an as upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving lt WARNING There is risk of jamming when moving the seats There is risk of injuries or risk of property damage Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad justment lt Electrically adjustable seats Overview Thigh support Forward back height tilt Shoulder support Backrest width Lumbar support O 0O A WN Backrest head restraint General information The seat adjustment for the driver s seat is stored for the profile currently used When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control the position is automatically retrie
371. toxic gas In enclosed areas ex haust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle There is danger to life Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila 209 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Climate control tion Do not switch on parked car heating in enclosed areas lt WARNING During parked car heating operation high temperatures can occur underneath the body e g caused by the exhaust gas system If combustible materials such as leaves or grass come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas system these materials can ignite There is risk of fire Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts during parked car heating operation lt At external temperatures below 32 F 0 C wa ter vapor occurs that emerges from below the vehicle Functional requirements gt The vehicle is in the idle or operating readi ness state Battery is sufficiently charged gt Parked car heating the fuel tank is filled to above the reserve range Open the vents to allow air to flow out Switching on off directly There are different ways to switch the system on or off It switches of automatically after some time The system continues to run for some time af ter being switched off Via the automatic climate control button When the vehicle is in standby state parked car ventilation can be switched on or off via the autom
372. trol must be outside of the vehicle in the area of the trunk lid An acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate closes The closing operation is interrupted gt By pressing the button again gt When starting the engine gt The vehicle starts off with jerks WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat ing the tailgate There is risk of injuries Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Opening and closing Controls Manual operation Comfort Access In the event of an electrical malfunction man ually operate the unlocked trunk lid slowly and Information smoothly To avoid locking it into the vehicle do not WARNING place the remote control in the cargo area Body parts can be jammed when operat ing the tailgate There is risk of injuries Make The concept sure that the area of movement of the tailgate The vehicle can be accessed without activat is clear during opening and closing lt ing the remote control All you need to do is to have the remote con Locking separately trol with you such as in your pants pocket The trunk lid can be locked separately with the The vehicle automatically detects the remote switch in the glove compartment If the glove control when it is in close proximity or in the compartment is locked the trunk lid cannot be Car s interior opened Comfort Access supports the following func
373. trol message is displayed Diesel engine During the measurement the idle speed is in creased somewhat General information A detailed measurement is only possible with certain engines Requirements gt Vehicle is on level road gt Selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed gt Engine is running and is at operating tem perature Performing a detailed measurement About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle status QY 7 Measure engine oil level Pe YS Start measurement The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale Time approx 1 minute 274 Adding engine oil Information CAUTION A too low engine oil level causes engine damage There is risk of property damage Add engine oil within the next 125 miles 200 km lt CAUTION Too much engine oil can damage the en gine or the catalytic converter There is risk of property damage Do not add too much engine oil Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a dealer s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop lt WARNING Operating materials e g oils greases coolants fuels can contain harmful ingredi ents There is risk of injuries or danger to life Observe the instructions on the containers Avoid the contact of articles of clothing skin or eyes with operating materials Do not refill op erating materials into different bottles Store operating materials
374. trument panel a iS A Select desired setting gt STANDARD All displays on the in strument cluster are active gt REDUCED All displays on the instru ment cluster are reduced to the essen tial gt INDIVIDUAL All displays on the in strument cluster are active Individual displays can be individually configured Individual view gt Driving mode display when the driving program is switched into ECO PRO or SPORT the instrument cluster automati cally switched into the respective view gt Traffic sign detection Speed Limit Info the traffic signs and additional signs recog nized via speed limit detection are dis played 114 7 On board computer 122 8 Driver assistance system displays Speed limit detection 120 9 Resetmiles 123 gt Speed limit exceeded if the speed rec ognized by speed limit detection is ex ceeded the exceeded range is marked red in the speedometer gt Instrument cluster with enhanced features Magnifier function the current speed is shown enlarged in the speedometer Check Control The concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head up Display In addition an acoustic signal may sound and a text message may appear on the Control Dis
375. ts e g lights and brakes gt Responses by the vehicle to special situa tions such as airbag deployment or engag ing the stability control system gt Ambient conditions such as temperature This data is purely technical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to opti mize vehicle functions Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data When service offerings are used e g re pair services service processes warranty claims quality assurance this technical infor mation can be read out from the event and fault memories by employees of the dealer s service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop including the manufacturer using special diagnostic tools You can obtain further information there if you need it After an error is corrected the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu ous basis With the vehicle in use there are situations where you can associate these technical data with individuals if combined with other infor mation e g an accident report damage to the vehicle eye witness accounts possibly with the assistance of an expert Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer such as vehicle emergency locating you can transmit certain vehicle data from the vehicle Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re corder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is
376. ts and reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro ductive harm Battery posts terminals and re lated accessories contain lead and lead com pounds Wash your hands after handling Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties gt New Vehicle Limited Warranty gt Rust Perforation Limited Warranty gt Federal Emissions System Defect War ranty gt Federal Emissions Performance Warranty California Emission Control System Lim ited Warranty Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information 8 Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region you may be required to adapt your ve hicle to meet differe
377. ts could occur lt Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph 160 km h 740Li 750i xDrive 750Li xDrive Without high speed tuning feature Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI Specifications in bar PSI with cold RARER tires CS 245 50R18100V 2 5 36 2 7139 M S A S RSC 245 50 R 18 100 H M S RSC 245 45 R19 102V 2 71 39 2 9 1 42 M S XL A S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL RSC 259 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Wheels and tires Tire size Front 245 45 R 19 98 Y RSC Rear 275 40 R 19 101 Y RSC Front 245 40 R 20 99 Y XLRSC Rear 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC Front 245 35 R 21 96 Y XL RSC Rear 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel T 135 80 R 18 104 M Pressure specifications in bar PSI 2 51 36 2 51 36 2 139 g 2 7 139 3 0 44 3 0 44 Speed up to a max of 50 mph 80 km h 4 2 60 With high speed tuning feature Tire size Specifications in bar PSI with cold tires 245 50 R 18 100 H M S RSC 245 45 R 19 102 V M S XL RSC Front 245 45 R 1998 Y RSC Rear 275 40 R 19 101 Y RSC 256 Pressure specifications in bar PSI RERER O 2 5130 27139 2 9 42 3 1 45 2 139 2 7 39 Tire size Pressure specifications in bar PSI Front 3 0 44 245 40 R 20 99 Y 30 44 XL RSC Rear 275 35 R 20 102 Y XL RSC Front 3 3 48 245 35 R 21 96 33148 Y XL RSC Rear 275 30 R 21 98 Y XL RSC Emergency wheel Speed
378. tton gt During calibration of the camera immedi ately after vehicle delivery gt If there are constant blinding effects be cause of oncoming light e g from the sun low in the sky Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are e g the warning time the more warnings are displayed However there may also be an ex cess of premature warnings Pedestrian warning with City braking function The concept The system can help prevent accidents with pedestrians The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a col 144 lision with pedestrians and includes a braking function The camera in the area of the rearview mirror controls the system Active Protection if a collision seems to be un avoidable PreCrash functions are triggered General information The system warns of possible collisions with pedestrians at speeds from ap prox 6 mph 10 km h to ap prox 35 mph 60 km h and supports you with a braking intervention shortly before a collision Under those circumstances it reacts to people who are within the detection range of the sys tem Detection range The detection area in front of the vehicle is div ided into two areas gt Central area arrow 1 directly in front of the vehicle gt Expanded area arrow 2 to the right and left A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo cated within the central area A warning is
379. tton should be at the height of the marking Overview Opening the trunk lid Unlocking Panic mode Locking Display Back Switching the display on off CON OO FP WN Micro USB charging port 56 Reception area The number of available remote control func tions depends on the distance from the vehi cle gt When you are in close proximity to the ve hicle all functions are available gt The status information can be called up in the extended reception area With parked car heating the parked car heating can be operated Without parked car heating the parked car ventilation can be operated gt Outside of the reception range of the vehi cle you can only display the last transmit ted status information from the vehicle Y The symbol is shown on the display if one of the buttons is pressed outside of the recep tion range Display Setup The display is divided into the upper status line the information area and the lower status line The upper status line displays the following in formation gt m Vehicle secured Vehicle not secured gt Set time in the vehicle gt C Charge state of the battery in the re mote control The information area can be used to access in formation and perform additional functions The lower status line indicates whether or not the remote control is within reception range refer to page 56 gt Connected Remote control is in the re
380. ty damage Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing lt In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing proceed as fol lows 1 Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there The pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain margin 2 Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx 4 seconds and hold it there The window closes without jam protection Safety switch The concept With the safety switch for the rear it is possible to block particular functions This makes sense for example if children or animals are carried in the rear General information The following functions can be locked using the switch gt Opening and closing of the rear windows using the switches in the rear gt Operation of the roller sunblind in the rear window using the switches in the rear gt Operation of the roller sunblinds in the side windows using the switches in the rear Adjustment of the power rear seats gt Operation of the rear sliding visor using the switches in the rear Information WARNING When operating the windows body parts and objects can be jammed There is risk of in juries or risk of property damage Make sure 71 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Opening and closing that the area of movement of the windows is
381. uirements gt The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated gt Operating readiness is switched on The Assist system is functional The button is located in the center console Initiating an Emergency Request 1 Touch the cover 2 Press the SOS button and hold until the Intelligent Emergency LED on the microphone lights up green Request gt The LED lights up green an Emergency Request was initiated The concept If a cancel prompt appears on the display In case of an emergency an Emergency Re the Emergency Request can be aborted quest can be made through this system If the situation allows wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab General information iish d Only press the SOS button in an emergency gt The LED flashes green when a connection For technical reasons the Emergency Request to the BMW Response Center has been cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con established ditions When the emergency request is received at the BMW Response Center the BMW 286 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you Even if you are unable to respond the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum stances For this data are transmitted to the BMW Response Center which serve to deter mine the necessary rescue measures E g the current position of the vehi
382. ully functional in the following situations gt When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own gt In heavy fog rain or snowfall In tight curves or on narrow lanes If the bumper is dirty or iced up or covered with stickers For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication Commission regulations Operation is gov erned by the following FCC ID 159 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Safety gt NBGOO9014A Compliance statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions gt This device may not cause harmful inter ference and gt this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Brake force display The concept gt During normal brake application the outer brake lights light up gt During heavy brake application the inner brake lights light up in addition Active Protection The concept Active Protection prepares occupants and the vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or collision situations 160 General information Active Protection consists of various PreCrash functions which can vary depending on the equipmen
383. up to a max of T 135 80 R 18 50 mph 80 km h 104 M 4 2160 Tire identification marks Tire size 245 45 R 18 96 Y 245 nominal width in mm 45 aspect ratio in R radial tire code 18 rim diameter in inches 96 load rating not for ZR tires Y speed rating before the R on ZR tires Speed letter Q up to 100 mph 160 km h R up to 106 mph 170 km h S up to 112 mph 180 km h T up to 118 mph 190 km h H up to 131 mph 210 km h V up to 150 mph 240 km h W up to 167 mph 270 km h Y up to 186 mph 300 km h Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Wheels and tires Mobility Tire Identification Number DOT code DOT xxxx xxx 0115 xxxx manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx tire size and tire design 0115 tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U S Department of Transportation Tire age DOT 0115 the tire was manufactured in the 1st week of 2015 Recommendation Regardless of wear and tear replace tires at least every 6 years Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AAA BC Temperature A B C All passenger car tires must conform to Fed eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating b
384. used Switching fragrancing on off adjusting intensity The fragrance intensity can be adjusted on the Control Display or via the button on the center console Adjusting via iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Climate functions Air quality Fragrance Level AP Spa Select desired setting Adjusting via button Press button once for each intensity level Highest intensity if three bars are shown on the climate control display Fragrancing is deactivated if no bars are dis played Adjusting via BMW Touch Command The ambient air package can also be operated using BMW Touch Command Display On the Control Display With operation via button the menu of the Am bient Air Package can be displayed on the Control Display automatically Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Climate control Controls Thus additional settings can be made if de sired About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Climate functions Air quality Fragrance aS Se SS Show fragrance setting The menu is shown on the Control Display Fragrance cartridge filling level The illustrations on the Control Display show the actual filling level of the fragrance car tridges About iDrive My Vehicle Vehicle settings Climate functions Air quality aS oh gt Fragrance The fill level of the current fragrance is dis played 6 Select desired setting If an empty fragrance c
385. utomatically g With the engine running engage lever in posi tion PR Spatially shaped markings are displayed refer to page 186 Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded Switch the system back on if needed 185 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Driver assistance systems Parking aid lines Pathway lines Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads Pathway lines depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements Turning circle lines Turning circle lines can only be superimposed on the rearview camera image together with pathway lines Turning circle lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road Only one turning radius line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain an gle Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1 Position the vehicle so that the red turning radius line leads to within the limits of the parking space 2 Turn the steering wheel to the point where the green pathway line covers the corre sponding turning radius line Obstacle marking Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC sensors Obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera Their colored margins of the o
386. utton on the remote control and hold for at least 3 seconds Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror gt The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds The alarm system is armed gt The indicator lamp flashes after locking Doors hood or tailgate are not correctly closed Correctly closed access points are secured After 10 seconds the indicator lamp flashes continuously Interior motion sen sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active When the still open access is closed inte rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on gt The indicator lamp goes out after unlock ing The vehicle has not been tampered with 69 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Opening and closing gt The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until drive readiness is switched on but no longer than approx 5 minutes An alarm has been triggered Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen sor can be switched off together such as in the following situations gt In automatic car washes gt In duplex garages gt During transport on trains carrying vehi cle
387. ve My Vehicle Vehicle settings Driver attention control YS Select desired setting gt Off no break recommendation is made gt Standard the break recommendation is made with a defined value gt Sensitive the break recommendation is issued earlier Display If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or fatigued a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break During the display the following settings can be selected gt Do not ask again gt Places to stop gt Remind me later The break recommendation is repeated af ter 20 minutes After a break another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi mately 45 minutes System limits The function may be limited in the following situations for instance and will either output an incorrect warning or no warning at all gt When the clock is set incorrectly 162 When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph 70 km h With a sporty driving style such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast In active driving situations such as when changing lanes frequently When the road surface is poor In the event of strong side winds Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving stability control systems Controls Driving stability control systems Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard country
388. ve Cruise Control on off 168 29 Resume speed 175 168 Automatic headlight con trol 130 Adaptive Light Control 131 High beam Assistant 132 Low beams 129 Pause or continue cruise con trol 175 168 9 m 2 VP WN cz Dn m Increase distance 168 te U Reduce distance 168 Instrument lighting 133 N LAT With steering and lane guidance assistant adjust speed 168 CE Right roadside parking lamp 130 Steering and lane control assis tant on off 177 fg 4 Left roadside parking lamp 130 Sri J IN O n 99 O O 5 m o O O s MD lt s n O 5 175 168 7 Central locking system 10 Instrument cluster 113 ra Unlocking 63 11 Steering wheel buttons right C1 Entertainment source ra Lock 63 C Volume 8 Steering column stalk left Turn signal 103 Voice activationsystem 33 High beams head Teen ene light flasher 103 Neig High beam Assistant 132 Thumbwheel for selection lists 121 m a Sloe 12 Steering column stalk right On board computer 122 vV ww ap 9 Steering wheel buttons left 15 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Ataglance GEE g Cockpit Wiper 103 14 Horn W 15 Steering wheel heating 87 Rainsensor 104 AUTO 16 Adjust steering wheel 87 Q gt ay Cleaning the windshield and QW headlights 105 17 Unlock hood 272 13 START Start stop engine 97 18 Open close trunk
389. ve ready state via emergency detection of the remote control If a respective Check Control message ap pears hold the remote control with its back against the marked area on the steering col umn The tailgate button on the remote control should be at the same height as the marked area Press the Start Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake pedal If the remote control is not recognized slightly change the height position of the remote con trol and repeat the procedure BMW display key General information Instead of a standard remote control the vehi cle is equipped with the BMW display key with an additional mechanical key If the BMW dis play key is used the mechanical key should be carried along e g in the wallet 95 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Opening and closing The BMW display key supports all functions of the standard remote control Beyond that the following functions are available gt Display status of doors and windows gt Display status of the alarm system gt With parked car heating operate parked car heating Without parked car heating operate parked car ventilation gt Call up range with available fuel Display service information Emergency detection of the BMW display key The description for the emergency detection of the remote control refer to page 55 also applies for the BMW display key However the locking bu
390. ved if the Func tion refer to page 68 is activated for this pur pose Adjustments in detail gt Forward back Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Adjusting gt Height Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re gion of the spine The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture gt Press the front rear section of the switch The curvature is increased decreased gt Seat tilt gt Press the upper lower sec tion of the switch The curvature is shifted up down Backrest width Change the width of the back rest using the side wings to ad a just the lateral support ul Shoulder support gt Backrest tilt gt Thigh support Also supports the back in the shoulder area gt Results in a relaxed seating position 77 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Adjusting gt Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles Gentleman function The concept The front passenger seat can be adjusted with the switches of the driver s seat e g to in crease the legroom in the rear Overview Gentleman function Switching on 2 iP Press button The LED lights up 2 Adjust the front passenger seat on your own seat If needed store the memory position refer to page 87 for the front passenger seat Switch off Press button and hold until
391. ving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire 1 Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers 2 Donot exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h 3 Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized In this case initialize the system Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on cargo load driv ing style and road conditions A vehicle with an average load has a possible driving range of approx 50 miles 80 km A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ ently e g it has reduced lane stability during braking a longer braking distance and different self steering properties Adjust your driving style accordingly Avoid abrupt steering ma neuvers or driving over obstacles e g curbs potholes etc Because the possible driving distance de pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip the actual distance may be shorter or lon 270 ger depending on the driving speed road con ditions external temperature cargo load etc WARNING Your vehicle handles differently when a run flat tire is damaged and has low or missing tire inflation pressure e g your lane stability is reduced when braking braking distances are longer and the self steering properties will
392. void dirtying the trunk 4 Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi cle Distributing the sealant Immediately drive approx 5 miles 10 km to en sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h If possible do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph 20 km h To correct the tire inflation pressure 1 Stop ata suitable location 2 Screw the connection hose of the com pressor directly onto the tire valve stem 3 Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle 4 Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least 2 0 bar gt Increase pressure with operating read iness switched on or the engine run ning switch on the compressor gt To reduce the pressure press the but ton on the compressor Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph 80 km h Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System as soon as possible 263 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Mobility Wheels and tires Snow chains Fine link snow chains The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends use of fine link snow chains Certain types of fine link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended as road safe and suitable Information regarding suitable snow chains is available from a dealer s service center or
393. weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 237 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Driving tips djs Loading Load z iis i i i lt Max Load wih ig lt Max Load i i oe lt Max Load The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo The greater the weight of the occupants the less cargo that can be transported Stowing cargo gt Cover sharp edges and corners on the Cargo gt Heavy cargo stow as far forward as possi ble directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests gt Very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the cargo area Wie is To secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area 238 Securing cargo WARNING Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car s interior e g in the event of an accident or during braking and eva sive maneuvers Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured There is risk of injuries Stow and secure objects and cargo properly lt gt Smaller and lighter items secure with re taining straps or with a cargo net or draw straps gt Larger and heavy objects secure with cargo straps Cargo straps cargo netting retaining straps or draw straps on the lashing eyes in the trunk
394. wing overview shows using which main menus the information and functions can be accessed Menu Information Function Security a ow information poor status Alarm system status After alarm triggering date time and reason for trigger ing the alarm Window status Glass sunroof status Vehicle Maintenance indicators of information Condition Based Service CBS refer to page 279 Status of the roadside park ing lamp MOBILITY Range with available fuel INFO Climate With parked car heating op control erate parked car heating re setting fer to page 209 Without parked car heating operate parked car ventila tion refer to page 209 Charging the remote control battery If the charge state of the remote control bat tery declines the display is switched off auto matically The battery must be recharged be fore the display can be switched back on The operability of the standard buttons is retained until the battery is completely run down To charge the remote control battery 57 Online Edition for Part no 0140 2 964 330 VI 15 Controls Opening and closing gt Place remote control with the lock button upward in the bulge of the wireless charg ing station underneath the center armrest gt Connect the remote control via the micro USB socket on the left side to a USB port Software information To display information stored in the BMW dis play key about the OpenSource software used proceed as
395. ws a steering dependent view in the respective driving direction This perspective adapts to the respective driv ing situation As soon as obstacles are detected the view changes to a fixed display of the area in front or at the rear behind the bumper or if necessary changes to a side view Movable camera perspective With selection of the movable camera per spective a circle appears on the Control Dis play By turning the controller or via touch function specified perspectives on the circle can be se lected The current perspective is marked with a cam era symbol With BMW Gesture Control an additional cam era symbols appears on the circuit This cam era symbol is freely movable via BMW Gesture Control refer to page 30 Exit the circle by pressing the controller or via touch function on the active camera symbol Top view The top view shows the vehicle and surround ings from above Rearview camera This view shows the picture of the rearview camera Function bar Assistance functions can be activated refer to page 189 via the function bar and settings ap plied gt Fe Parking Assistant refer to page 193 Brightness refer to page 192 Contrast refer to page 192 7 Parking aid lines refer to page 190 Pi Obstacle marking refer to page 190 Car wash refer to page 190 a3 Settings apply settings e g to use the activation points for Panorama View Assistance

Owner`s Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents